Home

ZyXEL 4728F User's Manual

1. 9 Table e 0O0 11 Part l Users rri dC 25 Chapter 1 Gelting to Know Bild j A A 27 pug KEE UW asa pastas ek a ede eS 27 LULE OTO CRI DERE edens best denetpbe inen o eX a bey aden eren Euer tance Geltont bp Od SEER Erin btR Reds 27 1 1 2 High Performance Switching Example eorr tnnt rennen 28 1 0 3 Gigabit Ethemet to Wie Desa ausseientinis dra nitida anoda a d 29 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Example iius t oet b adaini ines iae 29 NP pic TEN S 30 12 Waysdo Manage the SWHO uode cessrceac try leat teat rp DONNER Pee e Rta tes kn aspis teas 30 1 3 Good Habits Tor Managing the Gwitei emp Em 31 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection seccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeenseeeeeeeneeeeeeeens 33 2 1 Frecstanding instalation Me LL T TP 33 2 2 Mounting ihe Switch on a RAK e iaioa ri aA a A EAN IRA 34 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements ccccccceeeescccceeeeseceeeeeeseeeeereeeeseeeeenenees 34 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch esssseseeeess 34 2 2 3 Mounting The Switeh en p PON uec peter pe eite feces meee tenner Pise bae ia 35 Chapter 3 i i de 17 7 Y 37 ME SENS IU EET IH I seniii nik
2. 481 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 23 Table of Contents XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide PART I User s Guide Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction Your Switch is a stand alone layer 3 Gigabit Ethernet GbE switch with support for an optional 2 port 10 Gigabit uplink module The XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F also provides two 12 Gigabit stacking ports By integrating router functions the Switch performs wire speed layer 3 routing in addition to layer 2 switching The XGS 4526 comes with 20 100 1000 Mbps Ethernet ports and 4 GbE dual personality interfaces The XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F comes with 24 GbE dual personality interfaces A dual personality interface includes one Gigabit port and one slot for a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module with one port active at a time The XGS 4526 requires 100 VAC to 240 VAC 0 8 A power There are two XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F models The XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F DC model requires DC power supply input of 36 VDC to 72 VDC 1 5 A Max no tolerance The XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F AC model requires 100 VAC to 240 VAC 0 8 A power With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management See Chapter 56 on pag
3. 443 IM MAC TADE CVSS c nia aanere EOE a EA iaaa 443 5g viewing me NAG TADIG ssia aa aa aE dena draco fada aaa 444 Chapter 51 IP TAG c BRA 447 EIER UI e 447 22 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents oia t miM s c 448 Chapter 52 Pilar fM E E E E 451 SeA ARF THE OrENISW insin a E cioste eae 451 DATI ROW ARP WOKS Re H 451 Be SN eT TOE OOE siiis asic sland aie gad T T UT 452 Chapter 53 Routing Table Q 453 ENEE E E E 453 53 2 Viewing ihe Routing Table SUITS uissesa ncc ihr pe anc ca a acri N 453 Chapter 54 Po fs yi o C 455 S4 i Oa CONE p EEUU 455 Chapter 55 TROUBIGS O0 457 55 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDS 5 ico rent ral psia a kon rh a Ra Rata 457 pos witch Access and LOS sic iios tbe tah an Frob asp i rO dota e E ORT DERE EROR 458 GO SAU ure COAG irienn 461 Chapter 56 Xie s cs oci M tn 463 Append A Common OU IE aiiis eoru ouch e N ne a aec 473 Appendix B Legal Lele Lg eee eee ee ee ree m 477
4. LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number Destination This field displays the destination IP routing domain Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway device Interface This field displays the IP address of the Interface Metric This field displays the cost of the route Type This field displays the method used to learn the route OSPF added as an OSPF interface RIP learned from incoming RIP packets or STATIC added as a static entry XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 53 Routing Table XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 54 1 Configure Clone Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 245 Management gt Configure Clone Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Speed Duplex BPDU Control Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control VLAN Stacking Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Port Authentication Queuing Method IGMP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol AS Basic Setting 10 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 455 Chapter 54 Configure Clone C
5. Note After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 8 7 on page 113 or via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide 27 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Note The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP MRSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 133 Advanced Application Loop Guard c ONCE Active oO nn amp C0 ho DEPEDEBREDEDREDZ Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number m Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in lo
6. The Switch Computer Notebook computer Nome N _ EEEHHHEH EHHHHEH N Server Firewall NO NI er GI Gm Ga Moe Ter Nes 2S exe my NG eue rd AI Telephone Switch Router a ew US e Cz II Wu 5 Wu 6 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Safety Warnings Safety Warnings Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information For continued protection against risk of fire replace only with same type and rating of fuse Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anyt
7. 169 14 4 Bandwidth Control OVervigi usine cisci nod need aa bur t nara deua nina kane eR nad 169 SEMI de r 169 Td Bandh Colo SOLD uasa d rca onda amurca Dae Dd cae nda silly 170 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Contr 173 151 Broadcast Siom DEKO SIBI arrancan eS ERE RN RUD ERRAR 173 Chapter 16 POPP OYING PRI E 175 TOT POR PIS SGE ee ERN 175 Chapter 17 LINK Op eoi PTET 177 171 Link Aggregation I iris AE 177 12 2 Bi ysl calcd ely wees coe il ED Meee Pee et ere rere er etree TT erree ERR DERE AEG RA RIP RU rere ert er reer tr 177 prece ME POE PARET 178 173 LIK Aggregation SIAtUS m 179 17A LURE PAGANO ks 01s Tt ro 181 175 Link Aggregation Control PHONIC auspecicunishr biais pue uiadabbe e dts oo pMU icd tat QUadubbeve iN ehe nb dS 183 RA ee item Ti Malas i EXPE quite e rd prb Gd Pda gina d Ge RO c C edema b d Ra E ey 184 Chapter 18 Porn i 187 19 1 Port Authentication Val iM 52 d apsobds credis be aa 187 SEIEN PANEM CDU m 187 TOS MAC Tasty ile a 7 meen te mone ent uar tee erent GE Qo auc renee Eo Ox a KORR Ft D adiac 188 18 2 Fot Autsnication Co MUIR ssscctoesprivda n rue vo aep op notae S etx oduR E Era ERU Rev tae D osx oed nne eA 189 18 24 Apure EEE SOS TX Secu acitusossissennis pepe a eo unn a acd 190 Le
8. Apply Cancel 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 2 3 Configuring DHCP Relay Follow the steps below to enable DHCP relay on the Switch and allow the Switch to add relay agent information such as the VLAN ID to DHCP requests 1 Click IP Application DHCP and then the Global link to open the DHCP Relay screen 2 Select the Active check box 3 Enter the DHCP server s IP address 192 168 2 3 in this example in the Remote DHCP Server 1 field 4 Select the Option 82 and the I nformation check boxes 5 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory DHCP Relay d Status Active Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 2 3 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information v Option 82 Information v XGS 4728F Ap 6 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 7 The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the DHCP request 6 2 4 Troubleshooting Check the client A s IP address If it did not receive the IP address 172 16 1 18 make sure 1 Client A is connected to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 2 You configured the correct VLAN ID port number and system name for DHCP relay on both the DHCP server and the Switch
9. 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security In the Port Authentication screen click 802 1x to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 81 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x XAR Port Authentication Guest Vian Active F Port Active Max Req Reauth Reauth period Quiet period Tx period Supp Timeout Secs secs secs secs On 1 2 On 3600 60 30 30 2 F 2 On 3600 60 30 30 3 2 On 3600 60 30 30 4 a 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 2 On 3600 60 30 30 6 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 go 2 On 3600 60 30 30 8 2 On 3600 60 30 30 9 2 3600 60 30 INMME e al 28 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by p
10. OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 4 This trap is sent when the 2 2 1 MRSTP root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 4 2 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 4 2 2 1 MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 07 70 1 root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 1 07 70 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 07 70 1 STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 4 This trap is sent when the 2 2 2 MRSTP topology changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 4 2 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 4 2 2 2 MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 1 This trap is sent when the MSTP 07 70 2 root switch changes 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 1 07 70 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 07 70 2 mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when more 1 2 1 than 9996 of the MAC table is used 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when less than 1 2 2 9596 of the MAC table is used 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 150 SNMP Switch Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID
11. lost my configuration settings after restart the Switch Make sure you save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory each time you make changes Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently See also Section 45 3 on page 390 for more information about how to save your configuration DETVE Status A Logout H Help XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 171 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions Standard 19 rack mountable 438 mm W x 310 mm D x 44 45 mm H Weight XGS 4526 4 75 Kg XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F 4 9 Kg Power Specification XGS 4526 AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 8 A max 72 W internal universal power supply XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F AC 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 8 A max 85 W internal universal power supply DC 36 VDC 72 VDC 2 3 A max 80 W consumption There is no tolerance for the DC input voltage One Backup Power Supply BPS connector Interfaces XGS 4526 20 Gigabit Ethernet GbE copper ports plus 4 Dual Personality interfaces XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F 24 Gigabit Ethernet GbE Dual Personality interfaces Each Dual Personality interface has a 1000Base T port compatible with Cat5 5e 6 cop
12. GIRICIGIC CIGICIGIC amp amp m AAA AAAA E 61 6 9 aAA 1 6 9 0 9 AA ey BI B BJ BJ B 63 EY EY 63 Ey S 6 9 6 S EY ES 3 EY ES e e 6 63 9 BTIBTIT n BI BJ DJ BJ aAA S 6 0 EYES ES ES 63 3 Es S es 9 9 i BY 6 EY or Bg PES 53 62 EY 63 E x 9 9 S bIBIBBIbl 9 s es 9 9BIIBI 9 0 S050 5 5 5 5 5 5 m n 9 59 PbIBBblbls sm bbb e 5 l 7 e 8 a 8 8 5 s 5 8 8 S 8 8 S S S B 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2021 22 23 xn 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Fey Ems XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based port isolated VLAN configuration Figure 49 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation Portisolation Setting Wizard Incoming T l 7 e o s 2 8 2 x 2 e 5 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 5 8 B inmgimguauaaoadgBdlgmpoodoooBDBdliui uas ma 00000000000 0r r20 r00000 aos ooLbDE s 0000000000 00 0 0r00000 on annor 000 s 0000010000012111 00000070010000 0ccddn nno rr 0000d n aaaospglgia on on m pDopmaaoogooDOBEBgdlEooosoBDBDBDE o oo b nmnuBpaooogogaBmlnmi ux5aosocoDBDULDDDDE auos noagmpmmoaaoaaoaadUpilgusooopI bp a e pgauuuumilDIDpoaoeosououopmBbBmEEpooaoouEp s pnamnoagdJiUDmpoaosoooBBdIEpEococoucoucoubiLDp s 0000r 1000007200 1 010000002001 01000 s gogogo o 2 o e FIC
13. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 35 Policy Routing 35 2 Configuring Policy Routing Profile Click IP Application gt Policy Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Use this screen to configure a policy routing profile which can consist of multiple policy routing rules Figure 156 IP Application Policy Routing ED Policy Route g L1 Active Profile Name Index 1 Rule Configuration Add Cancel Active Profile name Delete Yes test L1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 109 IP Application gt Policy Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this policy routing profile and rules in the profile Profile Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Spaces are allowed Add Click Add to insert a new policy routing profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the policy routing profile Click a number to edit the policy routing profile entry Active This fie
14. 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This takes up to two minutes This does not affect the Switch s configuration Click Config 2 and follow steps 1 to 2 to reboot and load configuration two on the Switch 45 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before uploading to the device Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 213 Management Maintenance Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade g Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location ofthe binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting checkbox if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System I nfo screen to verify your current firmware version number 45 6 Restore a Configuration File Restore a previously saved configuration from your comput
15. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the number of the selective VLAN stacking rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 225 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Table 61 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Selective QinQ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied CVID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets SPVID This is the service provider s VLAN ID that adds to the packets from the subscribers Priority This is the service provider s priority level in the packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 24 1 24 1 1 24 1 2 Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry use
16. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 221 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Configure the fields as highlighted in the Switch VLAN Stacking screen Table 57 Single and Double Tagged 802 11Q Frame Format DA SA Len Dat FCS Untagged Etype a Ethernet frame DA SA TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS IEEE 802 1Q D y D Etype a customer tagged frame D SA SPTPI Priori VI TPI Priorit VI Len Dat FCS Double A D ty D D y D Etype a tagged frame Table 58 802 1Q Frame DA Destination Address Priority 802 1p Priority SA Source Address Len Length and type of Ethernet Etype frame SP TPI Service Provider Tag Protocol Data Frame data D Dentifier VID VLAN ID FCS Frame Check Sequence 23 4 Configuring VLAN Stacking Click Advanced Applications gt VLAN Stacking to display the screen as shown Figure 95 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking A ROC Nes Port CORNINE Active C Role Nomai Nomai Z Nomai rj Normal z Normal z Normal s Port hased QinQ Selective QinQ Tunnel TPID co e co SEokoko SFO Of oO co oe e Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this checkbox to enable VLAN stacking on t
17. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 327 Chapter 36 RIP uses the route that has the lowest metric value The following table lists the default administrative distance value of the route sources supported on the Switch Table 111 Default Distance Value ROUTE SOURCE ADMINISTRATIVE DISTANCE Local 0 Static 1 OSPF 110 RIP 120 36 2 Configuring RIP Click IP Application gt RIP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown You cannot manually configure a new entry Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 8 6 on page 110 Figure 158 IP Application gt RIP Active Distance Index 4 LD 120 Network Direction Version 192 168 1 2 24 None v RIP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 112 IP Application RIP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable RIP on the Switch Distance Enter a number from 10 to 255 to specify the administrative distance that is assigned to routes learned by RIP The lower the administrative distance value is the more preferable the routing protocol is See Section 36 1 1 on page 327 for more information about administrative distance Note You cannot set two routing protocols to have the same administrative distance Index This field displays the index num
18. Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 6 Attaching the Mounting Brackets XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Yoooooo 100000 qb oo P a WE Jooooooog PEKEN G 1000000 0 O0 AO 2 Using a 2 Philips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on
19. Distance 110 Name name Area ID 0 0 0 0 Authentication None Stub Network No Summary Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete The follow table describes the related labels in this screen Table 117 P Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Active OSPF is disabled by default Select this option to enable it Router ID Router ID uniquely identifies the Switch in an OSPF Enter a unique ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation for the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 117 P Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings LABEL DESCRIPTION Distance Enter a number from 10 to 255 to specify the administrative distance that is assigned to routes learned by OSPF The lower the administrative distance value is the more preferable the routing protocol is See Section 36 1 1 on page 327 for more information about administrative distance Note You cannot set two routing protocols to have the same administrative distance Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you
20. Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 19 3 VLAN MAC Address Limit Use this screen to set the MAC address learning limit on per port and per VLAN basis Click VLAN MAC Address Limit in the Advanced Application Port Security screen to display the screen as shown Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit OWES Limit ng Port Security Active n Port VID Limit Number Add Cancel Clear Index Active Port VID Limit Number Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port Security The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 48 Advanced Application gt Port Security gt VLAN MAC Address Limit LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to activate this rule Port Enter the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID Enter the VLAN identification number Limit Number Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port in a specified VLAN For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 in the XGS 4728F and from 0 to 8192 in the XGS 45
21. Peer Router ID This field displays the ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation of a peer border router Authenticatio n This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide IGMP This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch as a multicast router See also Section 24 4 on page 232 for information on IGMP snooping 38 1 IGMP Overview IP multicast is an IETF standard for distributing data to multiple recipients The following figure shows a multicast session and the relationship between a multicast server multicast routers and multicast hosts A multicast server transmits multicast packets and multicast routers forward multicast packets to multicast hosts Figure 168 IP Multicast Multicast Routers Hosts A host can decide to join or leave a multicast group at any time A host can also be a member of more than one multicast group Multicast groups are identified by IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 A multicast server sends packets addressed to a particular multicast group multicast IP address XGS 4526 4528F 4728
22. Secondary DNS This field displays the secondary DNS server value sent to clients from Server this DHCP server instance Address Leases This section displays information about the IP addresses this DHCP server issued to clients Index This field displays a sequential number for each DHCP request handled by the Switch IP Address This is the IP address issued to a DHCP client Timer This field displays the time remaining before the DHCP client has to renew its IP address Hardware This field displays the MAC address of the DHCP client Address It may also display SELF OCCUPIED ADDRESS if the IP address cannot be used for DHCP because it is already assigned to the Switch itself Hostname This field displays the system name of the client XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 41 4 DHCP Relay 41 4 1 Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an P address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains
23. Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 65 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 24 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and le
24. TACAS server index becomes reachable SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING TACAS server index is unreachable SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG DEBU Port port link up SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG DEBU Port port link down SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG INFO LLDP Remote topologyChange SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Temperature Over Alarm High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Temperature Over Warn High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Temperature Under Alarm Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Temperature Under Warn Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Voltage Over Alarm High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Voltage Over Warn High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Voltage Under Alarm Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE Vol
25. Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted M Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 101 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Table 101 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Trusted State Untrusted Trusted ports are uplink ports connected to PPPoE servers e f a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports e f a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Untrusted ports are downlink ports connected to subscribers f a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received
26. 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 45 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions 45 8 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file also known as the romfile or ROM contains the factory default settings in the screens such as password Switch setup IP Setup and so on Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance 45 8 1 1 ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 142 Filename Conventions INTERNA EXTERNA L NAME L NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration config cfg This is the configuration config filename on File the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log FILE TYPE Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch Example FTP Commands ftp put firmware
27. 46 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 144 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five No limit sessions accounts A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for more information on disabling multi login 46 2 The Access Control Main Screen Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 216 Management Access Control c OIUA SNMP Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Click Here Click Here Click Here Click Here XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 397 Chapter 46 Access Control 46 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrat
28. Fuse Specification 250 VAC TAA For DC version switchboard Approvals Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A Table 172 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address In band 192 168 1 1 Out of band Management port 192 168 0 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User admin Name Default Password 1234 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 172 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS also available IP Routing Domain An IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port Configure an IP routing domain to allow the Switch to route traffic between different networks VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router VLAN Stacking Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter
29. Li Ini M DHCP Se rver 192 168 2 3 Port 2 PVID 102 m 172 16 1 18 6 2 2 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 as a member of VLAN 102 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory xung NN 80210 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active VLAN Type r MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer pon milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level6 e gt levels 5 gt level4 4 level3 3 level2 1 leveli joz level 2 Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VALN 102 for example in the Name field and enter 102 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure port 2 to be a permanent member of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Static VLAN ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID
30. Password Group admin v Aaa Index Username SecurityLevel Authentication Privacy Group Delete a test noauth MD5 DES readwrite E Beee The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 153 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User LABEL DESCRIPTION User Information Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this screen to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Username Specify the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose e noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authentication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower XGS 4526 4528F 4
31. RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1723 RIP 2 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2338 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP RFC 2698 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRI DGE MIB Q BRI DGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 3 RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP IEEE 802 1ag Connectivity Fault Management CFM IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control IEEE 802 3z 1000BASE X For optical fiber l
32. Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 46 3 3 on page 400 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 3 6 Configuring SNMP User From the SNMP screen click User to view the screen as shown Use the User screen to create SNMP users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 and associate them to SNMP groups An SNMP user is an SNMP manager Figure 220 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User User Information g SNMP Setting Username Security Level noauth Authentication MD5 Password Privacy DES
33. Sequence Statement Permit Deny Classifier Action Next Hop 0 0 0 0 Active Profile name Seq State Classifier Rule Delete Yes policyroute 1 1 permit class 2 oO Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 325 Chapter 35 Policy Routing The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 110 IP Application gt Policy Routing gt Rule Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name This field displays the policy routing profile s you configure in the IP Application gt Policy Routing screen Select a profile for which you want to configure a policy routing rule Sequence Enter the rule number from 1 to 64 The ordering of your rules is important as rules are applied in turn You can not specify a number already in use by another rule Statement Select Permit to forward traffic that matches this rule to the gateway specified in the rule Select Deny to disable the rule action and forward traffic that matches this rule according to the routing table on the Switch Classifier This field displays the available active classifiers you configure in the Classifier screen see Chapter 20 on page 201 which are not used by any policy rule or policy routing rule Select a classifier to which this policy routing rule applies Action Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the pack
34. Table 107 Advanced Application Private VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to enable private VLAN in a VLAN Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes VLAN ID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN to which this rule applies Promiscuous Ports Enter the number of the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN Other ports belonging to this VLAN will be added to the isolation list and can only send and receive traffic from the port s you specify here Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of the rule Active This shows whether this rule is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule VLAN This is the VLAN to which this rule is applied Promiscuous Ports This shows the port s that can communicate with any ports in the same VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 33 Private VLAN Table 107 Advanced Applicati
35. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management Table 165 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clustering Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon A appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same passwor
36. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 33 1 Private VLAN This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a VLAN Private VLAN Overview Private VLAN allows you to do port isolation within a VLAN in a simple way You specify which port s in a VLAN is not isolated by adding it to the promiscuous port list The Switch automatically adds other ports in this VLAN to the isolated port list and blocks traffic between the isolated ports A promiscuous port can communicate with any port in the same VLAN An isolated port can communicate with the promiscuous port s only Note You can have up to one private VLAN rule for each VLAN Figure 152 Private VLAN Example 1 l m in VLAN 123 i J Isolated ports 2 6 I Promiscuous port 10 Note Make sure you keep at least one port in the promiscuous port list for a VLAN with private VLAN enabled Otherwise this VLAN is blocked from the whole network XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 315 Chapter 33 Private VLAN 33 2 Configuring Private VLAN Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 153 Advanced Application Private VLAN Active Name VLAN ID OLGA Promiscuous Ports Index Active Add Cancel Clear Name VLAN Promiscuous Ports Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen
37. as shown Figure 111 Advanced Application AAA OE RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here AAA Setup Click Here 25 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 244 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 25 3 on page 254 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 112 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup PO ms serverseup Authentication Server Mode index priority x AAA Timeout an seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 n 2 0 0 0 0 1812 LH Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout sn seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 2 0 0 0 0 1813 n Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication settings Mode This field only applies if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not re
38. i q M o E c EE 56 Chapter 5 initial Setup Example 57 SIENO Te EUM 57 E T3 Connounbg en IP TONG ODO iuscunaiese teen oiiaaie pana cbr du E cula ide n Uoc 57 51 2 Communi DHCP Server Solia ace spp pat erue AEE 59 Sie Peano M n S 59 NEIN unpsBu cd tie UE eeteeee 61 Pcr Duali deer 62 Chapter 6 i 63 8 1 Howto Dee DACP Snooping on the WCC iic dac innia aaa 63 6 2 How to Use DACP Relay on the SWIIGN secco edic rre eee aati eres 67 6 27 DHCP Relay Tutaona Introdgellbld 3 circi ord ero aida on ac e bci End 67 Oe UN tL ee Em 68 Cee Sure DHCP lp a 71 CES Sape cheers NS E UOS Fi 6 3 How to Uss PPPOE JA on the SIWON uiae eques per Ned ebec utis bere Tudela ta Up eaS 72 SEC REC Tun decis io D RD A T rer ererr ey 73 E22 EXSTITIT TERNI SAE lc ae eee enn oe ene docb Gar owl clum RUD LUE RERO Cod tS 75 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch essssssssseee 77 12 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents B5 How o Set Upa Guest VLAN ussssssouier ient Epl n colpi du bep ed p eno ob 80 Bad ceeamoo OBL VLAN aa a d dub Arion unosi asesinar da eR 81 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 902 1x Port Authgnticellgri cease rre rtnnr rr rre eoruin cade eus 83 Bete Bra Re uk VEAN MS UU S 84 06 HON To Do Pon NS Nd VLAN aausmetadisetete finds en rM te
39. m p REDE EDI Interva 300 300 300 300 Errdisable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 106 Advanced Application Errdisable Errdisable Recovery LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to turn on the error disable recovery function on the Switch Reason This field displays the supported features that allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard packets on a port according to the feature requirements and what action you configure i Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Timer Status Select this option to allow the Switch to wait for the specified time interval to activate a port or allow specific packets on a port after the error was gone Deselect this option to turn off this rule Interval Enter the number of seconds from 30 to 2592000 for the time interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EJ Chapter 32 Error Disable
40. Active Iv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID foo 08F t CSTN 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 108 MVR Group Configuration Example O TD Multicast VLAN ID 200 gt lt 5 Name Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 E News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 rH Delete Cancel Figure 109 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration D MVR Multicast VLAN ID 200 Name Start Address End Address fo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 O 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel EXAMPLE 242 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide AAA This chapter describes how to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA Authentication is the process of determining who a
41. Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 82 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable DHCP snooping on the VLAN You still have to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Option82 Select this to have the Switch add the slot number port number and VLAN ID to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 269 Information Select this to have the Switch add the system name to DHCP requests that it broadcasts to the DHCP VLAN if specified or VLAN You can configure the system name in the General Setup screen See Chapter 8 on page 101 You can specify the DHCP VLAN in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See
42. Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify this protocol based VLAN Ethernet type Use the drop down list box to select a predefined protocol to be included in this protocol based VLAN or select Others and type the protocol number in hexadecimal notation For example the IP protocol in hexadecimal notation is 0800 and Novell IPX protocol is 8137 Note Protocols in the hexadecimal number range of 0x0000 to OxO5ff are not allowed to be used for protocol based VLANs VID Enter the ID of a VLAN to which the port belongs This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch will assign to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this protocol based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing protocol based VLAN Active This field shows whether the protocol based VLAN is active or not Port This field shows which port belongs to this protocol based VLAN Name This field shows the name the protocol based VLAN Et
43. General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup ES 2024PWRIES 2024PWR Advanced Application IP Application VLAN Static Routing Static MAC DiffServ Forwarding DHCP Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard In Save Status O Logout B Help Member Menu Management Access Control Diagnostic Syslog MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone Port Status Save XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management 49 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can use FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 237 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch User 331 230 ftp ls 200 Port 226 File ftp 297 ftp bin 00 Type ftp put 00 Port N N N 26 File tp ftp h rW rIW IW W W W rW rIW IW C gt ftp 192 168 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 Switch FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 192 168 0 1 none Enter PASS command Password admin Logged in command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W Ww 1 owner 1 owner 1 owner 1 owner sent OK group group group group bytes received in 0 00Seconds 297000
44. NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Invalid Tunnel Type lt type gt User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING 802 1x Invalid Tunnel Medium Type type User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING 802 1x Less or more VLAN attributes User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Too many bandwidth attributes User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Invalid bandwidth format lt Ingress Egress gt User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG WARNING 802 1x Invalid VLAN ID VLAN ID User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Invalid VLAN setting the switch is with port based VLAN SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Static VLAN VLAN ID does not exist User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Ingress bandwidth lt bandwidth gt is out of range User name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG WAR
45. OMS Bridge Prionty Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay ree Protoco Status Active o 32768 2 Seconds 20 Seconds 15 Seconds Port Active Edge Priority Path Cost Oo oO 1 oO v 128 4 2 o M 128 4 3 oO v 128 4 4 Ll v 128 4 5 oO v 128 4 6 o v 128 a a Oe Oe ee 28 oO v 128 2 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the RSTP Status screen see Figure 64 on page 157 Active Select this check box to activate RSTP Clear this checkbox to disable RSTP Note You must also activate Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable RSTP on the Switch Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time
46. VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server for one VLAN and at the same time the Switch can be configured to relay DHCP requests for clients in another VLAN 41 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel The DHCP Status screen displays Figure 185 IP Application gt DHCP Status ED DHCP Status g Global VLAN Server Status Index VID 1 2 Server Status 192 168 2 100 IP Pool Size 66 Relay Status Relay Mode VLAN 1 3 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 130 IP Application gt DHCP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP server mode Index This is the index number VID This field displays the VLAN ID for which the Switch is a DHCP server Server Status This field displays the starting DHCP client IP address IP Pool Size This field displays the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to clients Relay Status This section displays configuration settings related to the Switch s DHCP relay mode Relay Mode This field displays None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 41
47. You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 2 In this example you want to configure port 1 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN f y N lh X TR qa VLAN1 i VLAN2 i E m Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time 1 1 1 00 31 Change Pages Previous Next Pe Vaneau VLAN Port Setting In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name in the Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group ID field for the VLAN2 network Status Static Static VLAN VLAN Status ACTIVE v Name Example VLAN Group ID 2 Port Control Tagging Norms cuan 1 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden I TxTagging V NOTTIS xeu z OrpIdde v x Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 3g EXAMPLE 7 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden aggin 8 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden v Tx Tagging Note The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup screen refer to the same VLAN ID XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to
48. between multiple routing paths when the Switch is connected to more than one next hop ECMP works with static routes or a routing protocol such as OSPF With ECMP packets are routed through the paths of equal cost according to the hash algorithm output 44 2 Configuring Load Sharing Click IP Application gt Load Sharing in the navigation panel to display the Screen as shown next Figure 209 IP Application gt Load Sharing OIL iti aD Active o Criteria src dstip Aging Time 1200 seconds Discover Time 3600 seconds Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 387 Chapter 44 Load Sharing 388 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 140 IP Application gt Load Sharing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP routing on the Switch Criteria Select the criteria the Switch uses to determine the routing path for a packet Select src ip to have the Switch use a hash algorithm to convert a packet s source IP address into a hash value which acts as an index to a route path Select src dst ip to have the Switch use a hash algorithm to convert a packet s source and destination IP addresses into a hash value which acts as an index to a route path Aging Time Specify the time interval from 0 to 86400 in increments of 10 in seconds at which the Switch sends an ARP request to update a resolved next h
49. changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Click on an index number to view more details and edit an existing account Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level This field displays whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication with this user Authenticat This field displays the authentication algorithm used for SNMP ion communication with this user Privacy This field displays the encryption method used for SNMP communication with this user Group This field displays the SNMP group to which this user belongs Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time An administrator is s
50. display the screen as shown Figure 97 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Selective QinQ XD VLAN Stacking Active D Name Port CVID SPVID Priority o Add Cancel Index Active Name Port CVID SPVID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Selective QinQ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring CVID Enter a customer VLAN ID the inner VLAN tag from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets from the subscribers SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
51. packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide E Chapter 24 Multicast 24 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast in the navigation panel Click the Multicast Setting link and then the IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the Screen as shown See Section 24 1 4 on page 228 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN Figure 100 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN CE OMF snooping VLAN Mode auto C fixed Multicast Setting VLAN Index Name VID Delete Apply Cancel Es ay Add Cancel Clear Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership information of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch c
52. rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 26 6 2 on page 276 Syslog rate Type the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 48 on page 425 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 5 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Type how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The
53. s level4 4 level3 3 level2 1 level joz level 2 Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN 4 In the Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 200 for example in the Name field and enter 200 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 1 2 3 and 10 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Ra Cancel Gear SCA D VLAN Status ACTIVE Name VLAN 200 VLAN Group ID 200 Port Control Tagging Normal v Tx Tagging 1 Normal Fixed Forbidden Tx Taggina 2 Normal Fixed Forbidden C Tx Tagging 3 Normal Fixed Forbidden C Tx Tagging Normal O Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 5 Normal O Fixed Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 Normal O Fixed Forbidden v Tx Tagging 7 Normal O Fixed O Forbidden v Tx Tagging 8 Normal O Fixed Forbidden v Tx Tagging 9 Normal O Fixed Forbidden v Tx Tagging 9 Fixed Forbidden C Tx Tagging J Fixe Tx ng Setting link in the VLAN Status screen 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN sc
54. sFlow PPPoE Errdisable Private VLAN The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 5 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information and time settings for the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server and set up to 64 IP routing domains Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure speed flow control and priority settings for individual Switch ports Advanced Application XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu You can also configure a protocol based VLAN or a subnet based VLAN in these screens Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static M
55. 00Kbytes sec I OK 3701t0 bin fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 00 58 46 1970 3042210 Jul 393216 Jul 0 Jul 0 Jul 01 01 01 01 125 1235 12 1 23 00 00 00 00 ras config fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 received OK 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 164 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 3701t0 bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upload to the cluster member switch fw 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 01 23 46 This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen in the cluster manager switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management 49 3 Clustering Management Configuration Use this screen to configure clustering management Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Figure 238 Management Clustering Management Configuration SNSUHCHODRSERECENDCUHCnuf TEE Status Clust
56. 1 Multi Host 1 6 O 1 Multi Host 1 7 C 1 Multi Host 1 8 F 1 Mult Host v 1 a Ae ee 8 1 M w cHost 1 Apply 3 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently Clients that attach to port 1 2 or 3 and fail to authenticate with the RADIUS server now should be in VLAN 200 and can access the Internet but cannot communicate with devices in VLAN 1 6 6 How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN You want to prevent communications between specific ports in a VLAN but still allow them to access the Internet or network resources in the same VLAN You use XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials Private VLAN to do port isolation in a VLAN instead of assigning each port to a separate VLAN and creating a different IP routing domain for each individual port Internet gt C In this example you put ports 2 to 5 in VLAN 123 and create a private VLAN rule for VLAN 123 to block traffic between ports 2 3 and 4 6 6 1 Creating a VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 2 3 4 and 5 as a member of VLAN 123 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory EES aD VLAN TWA 902 10 C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active E MAC Address Learning Ag
57. 1p Mapping foz io o a o gt a 0 gt s o gt e 0 gt 7 0 gt ty fe ots us hs tel ois tts 16 2 v 17 2 18 2 v 19 2 v 20 2 21 22 2 v 23 2 7 24 3 7 25 3 26 3 7 27 3 28 3 7 29 3 7 30 3 313 32 4 7 33 4 v 34 4 v 35 4 7 36 4 v 37 4 v 38 4 v 39 4 7 40 5 45 42 5 v 43 5 7 44 5 v 45 5 v 46 5 v 47 5 v 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 6 v 53 6 v 54 6 v 55 6 56 57 v 58 v 59 v 60 81 62 63 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 129 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE 802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP feature 41 1 DHCP Overview 41 1 1 41 1 2 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a
58. 2 PPPoE IA Per Port Per VLAN Use this screen to configure PPPoE IA settings that apply to a specific VLAN on a port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent gt Port screen to display the screen as shown Figure 146 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN VAN Port Show Port Port Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply Port 2 VID Circuit id Remote id 10 11 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 102 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show Port Enter a port number to show the PPPoE Intermediate Agent settings for the specified VLAN s on the port Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below Port This field displays the port number specified above VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adj
59. 227 802 1 priority 229 and IGMP 227 IGMP throttling 231 IP addresses 227 overview 227 setup 229 multicast delivery tree 350 multicast group 233 multicast router mrouter 350 multicast VLAN 239 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 150 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 149 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 147 Multiple STP 149 Multiple STP see MSTP 150 MVR 235 configuration 237 group configuration 239 network example 235 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 235 N network management system NMS 398 NTP RFC 1305 105 O OSPF 331 advantages 331 area 331 337 Area 0 331 area ID 338 authentication 337 338 autonomous system 331 backbone 331 configuration steps 333 general settings 336 how it works 332 interface 332 334 341 link state database 332 335 network example 332 priority 333 redistribute route 340 route cost 338 router elections 333 router D 336 router types 332 status 334 stub area 331 338 virtual link 333 virtual links 343 vs RIP 331 OSPF Open Shortest Path First 331 OSPF redistribution 339 P PAGP 294 password 53 administrator 412 PHB Per Hop Behavior 353 ping test connection 424 policy 209 212 326 and classifier 209 326 and DiffServ 207 configuration 209 326 example 213 overview 207 rules 207 208 viewing 211 policy configuration 212 policy routing benefits 323 cost savings 323 load sharing 323 overview 323 policy based routing 323 Port Agg
60. 3 DHCP Server Status Detail Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and then click an existing index number of a DHCP server configuration to view the screen as shown Use XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP this screen to view details regarding DHCP server settings configured on the Switch Figure 186 IP Application gt DHCP gt DHCP Server Status Detail Address Leases Index Server Status Detai Start IP Address End IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server IP Address DHCP Status 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 62 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 254 192 168 5 1 192 168 5 2 Timer Hardware Address Hostname The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 131 IP Application gt DHCP Server Status Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION Start IP This field displays the starting IP address of the IP address pool Address configured for this DHCP server instance End IP Address This field displays the last IP address of the IP address pool configured for this DHCP server instance Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask value sent to clients from this DHCP server instance Default This field displays the default gateway value sent to clients from this Gateway DHCP server instance Primary DNS This field displays the primary DNS server value sent to clients from this Server DHCP server instance
61. 398 SNMP traps 400 supported 400 401 403 406 source based routing 323 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 147 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 216 SSH encryption methods 415 how it works 414 implementation 415 SSH Secure Shell 413 SSL Secure Socket Layer 415 standby ports 178 static bindings 259 static MAC address 137 static MAC forwarding 127 129 137 static multicast address 141 static multicast forwarding 141 static route configuration 320 overview 319 static routes 321 static trunking example 184 Static VLAN 122 static VLAN control 124 tagging 124 status 95 LED 45 link aggregation 179 OSPF 334 port 95 port details 97 power 103 STP 156 160 166 VLAN 121 VRRP 372 STP 147 294 468 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index bridge ID 157 161 bridge priority 155 159 configuration 154 158 162 designated bridge 148 forwarding delay 155 159 Hello BPDU 148 Hello Time 155 157 159 161 how it works 148 Max Age 155 157 159 161 path cost 148 156 160 port priority 156 160 port state 149 root port 148 status 156 160 166 terminology 147 vs loop guard 283 stub area 331 338 stub area See also OSPF 338 subnet based VLANs 126 and DHCP VLAN 127 and priority 126 configuration 127 summary address 339 341 switch lockout 54 switch reset 54 switch setup 108 switching 468 syntax conventions 5 syslog 263 425 protocol 425 server setup 427 settings 426 setup 426 severity levels 425 system informa
62. 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG CRITICAL system voltage has recovered to normal state SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG CRITICAL lt FAN1 FAN2 gt RPM value value is lower than its limit RPM value SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG CRITICAL The RPM of the fan has recovered to normal state SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG EMERGEMC Y BOARD MAC PHY gt temperature value value exceeds its limit temperature value SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG EMERGEMC Y system temperature has recovered to normal state SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG ERR Restore system configuration failed CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG ERR Load factory default configuration CH failed SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG ERR Gets the time and date from a time CH server failed SP SYSLOG TYPE IP SYSLOG INFO Ping probe to target ip address gt failed SP SYSLOG TYPE IP SYSLOG INFO Ping test to target ip address failed SP SYSLOG TYPE IP SYSLOG INFO Ping test to lt target ip address gt completed SP SYSLOG TYPE IP SYSLOG INFO Trace path to target ip address completed SP SYSLOG TYPE IP SYSLOG INFO Trace path to target ip address failed SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Traffic of type type from port CH port is abnormal SP SYSLOG TYPE SW
63. A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 167 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 35 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the
64. ARP table and broadcasts the ARP request to all the devices on the LAN When the Switch receives the ARP reply from host B it updates its ARP table and also forwards host A s ICMP request to host B After the Switch gets the ICMP reply from host B it sends out an ARP request to get host A s MAC address and updates the ARP table with host A s ARP reply The Switch then can forward host B s ICMP reply to host A Sx N ces A B ARP Request P ARP Reply I CMP Request 5 ARP Request p ARP Reply ICMP Request ICMP Reply ARP Request s ARP Reply 5 4 ICMP Reply 43 1 2 2 Gratuitous ARP A gratuitous ARP is an ARP request in which both the source and destination IP address fields are set to the IP address of the device that sends this request and the destination MAC address field is set to the broadcast address There will be no reply to a gratuitous ARP request A device may send a gratuitous ARP packet to detect IP collisions If a device restarts or its MAC address is changed it can also use gratuitous ARP to inform XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 ARP Learning other devices in the same network to update their ARP table with the new mapping information In Gratuitous ARP learning mode the Switch updates its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request 43 1 2 3 ARP Request When the Switch is in ARP Request learning mode it updates the ARP
65. Bk Pas xus fuh Xs Xgh uh See tek Caa 74 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview The following table describes the ports Table 1 Panel Connections dl DESCRIPTION 20 100 1000 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports XGS 4526 only 4 or 24 Dual Each interface has one 1000Base T copper RJ 45 port and one mini GBIC Personality Gigabit Interface Converter fiber port with one port active at a time Interfaces e 4 or 24 1000Base T Ports Connect these ports to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet switches using Category 5 5e 6 1000Base T Ethernet cables Use an 8 wire Ethernet cable for Gigabit connections Using a 4 wire Ethernet cable limits your connection to 100 Mbps Note that the connection speed also depends on what the Ethernet device at the other end can support 4or 24 Mini GBIC Ports Use Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers in these ports for 1000Base X fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet switches 3 1 1 Dual Personality Interfaces There are 4 or 24 Dual Personality interfaces comprising 4 or 24 1000Base T mini GBI C combo ports For each interface you can connect either to the 1000Base T port or the mini GBIC port The mini GBIC ports have priority over the 1000Base T ports This means that if a mini GBIC port and the corresponding 1000B
66. Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 32 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MRSTP to edit MRSTP settings on the Switch Delay second Tree Select which STP tree configuration you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost
67. Connections The following table describes the ports on the rear panel Table 2 Panel Connections CONNECTO R DESCRIPTION Optional two XFP or CX4 Ports These ports are available when you install an EM 422 or ES 412 in the optional uplink module B in the figure above Both the EM 422 and ES 412 are used to connect your switch to other high speed Ethernet switches for stacking in you network For EM 422 connection Use 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable XFP transceivers to connect 1000Base X fiber optic cables to these ports See Section 3 1 3 1 on page 39 and Section 3 1 3 2 on page 40 for information on installing and removing transceivers e For EM 412 connection Use 10GBase CX4 cables to connect to these ports See the EM 422 and EM 412 User s Guides for more information Two stacking ports Connect these ports to other XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F switches for stacking using stacking cables XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F Management Connect to a computer using an RJ 45 Ethernet cable for local Port configuration of the Switch Console Port Only connect this port to your computer using an RS 232 cable if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 2 5 Power Connector Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the panel and that no obj
68. DESCRIPTION rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when a variable 0 1 goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when the 0 2 variable falls below the RMON falling threshold cfm dotlagCfmFaultAlarm 1 3 111 2 802 1 1 8 0 1 The trap is sent when the Switch detects a connectivity fault 46 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen Figure 218 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP As NP Access Control Trap Group User General Setting Version v2c S Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username v2c 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 vic v o000 X 1 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 151 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to specify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 407 Chapter 46 Access C
69. DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Relay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 187 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global ED DHCP Relay Status Active E Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information r1 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 133 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot Information number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin con
70. DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually DHCP Modes The Switch can be configured as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent f you configure the Switch as a DHCP server it will maintain the pool of IP addresses along with subnet masks DNS server and default gateway information and distribute them to your LAN computers f there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP
71. DUREE ELA A dont bidcobundt bO Gasket E A Dew La i aped DOG af xu 191 18 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication 22 cocci eser ctr ro a a 194 Chapter 19 2 15 1 A A 197 eo PON CUS EN ana oo 197 pue slip l er T 198 12S YLANIMAC Address Limit TR NIE I 199 Chapter 20 E C 201 20 1 Ab ut the Classifier and GOS asiatexkondisrtnsdetodas dias a etn nbi daa Ra a da 201 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 15 Table of Contents ED 2 Conigdring dae Gassier st xeupiaasapbisak ebria t ontario aacra rad opel pes Landa it 201 20 9 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuralion 1 sessanta tana 204 apa Classer EXAMP qe 206 Chapter 21 4 4 HeoOES 207 Z1 T1 Pop BURG OVN sisian oia a baden ddnde adr ada RUD a 207 car D EE EE ERE UU 207 212 Door and Perro BRIDE uiuere prb ad ned aua cen A Rebcd ra p rds vai tse 207 215 CS POE RUES ac ioredondiier dut itlan a UR an RR 208 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration ucuccec eoe pocosie iren ere pascere sonne cere aar 211 214 Paley EXImple aa addo eaa nearer ee ute 213 Chapter 22 en eei nae me ee ee rege noe a ee Pee ere ene eee eee Er 215 ec Oneng Marhod CSI uoscotei E m debi tet RR e eae 215 ze Po PQ ya idunt bo dU Pb cesa dc rac sao adt Ear a uU apr 215 FN AS vlr edat QUEUING NR T 215 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Sch
72. Desktop The Switch is an ideal solution for small networks which demand high bandwidth for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers and servers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch Use the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module to provide high speed access to a data server and the Internet The uplink module supports a fiber optic connection which alleviates the distance limitations of copper cabling In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server and access the Internet To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers and so on Figure 3 Gigabit to the Desktop pou Internet J hb 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Example A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one or more groups With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 9 on page 117 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increasing network performance by reducing broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s G
73. Figure 78 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process bo T O wg T 9 New Connection Identity Request Authentication Request Qu Access Challenge Challenge Request Login Credentials Challenge Response Access Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 1 2 MAC Authentication MAC authentication works in a very similar way to IEEE 802 1x authentication The main difference is that the Switch does not prompt the client for login credentials The login credentials are based on the source MAC address of the 188 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication client connecting to a port on the Switch along with a password configured specifically for MAC authentication on the Switch Figure 79 MAC Authentication Process Ed N di 1 New Connection Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 18 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate the port authentication method s you want to use both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings in the AAA Radius Server Setup screen To activate a port authentication method click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel Select a port authentication method in the screen that appears Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication D Port Authentication
74. Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard Static Binding Figure 118 IP Source Guard Static Binding ESE D IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 78 IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the source MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field di
75. Kbps ri 1 Kbps 3 rH 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps r 1 Kbps 4 rH 1 Kbps 1 Kbps ri 1 Kbps 5 r 1 Kbps 1 Kbps on kiks 6 m 1 Kbps 1 Kbps n p Kbps 7 n 1 Kbps 1 Kbps n p Kbps Imm lt gt S Iunii Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Rate Active Select this check box to activate commit rate limits on this port Commit Specify the guaranteed bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port The commit rate should be less than the peak rate The sum of commit rates cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth Active Select this check box to activate peak rate limits on this port Peak Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for Rate the incoming traffic flow on a port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control Table 36 Advanced Application gt Band
76. Logout Help CLIE Application Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Erri oe Rx KB s D E 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 EOR 1 Ee ppiicaden 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00000 Management 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 i Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 13 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 0 00 00 47 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 an Mawn eran Nieshind n n n nn nn nanan gt C Any l 7 oR C Clear Counter A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is saved in the configuration file from which the Switch booted fr
77. Number This is the number of VLANs that match the searching criteria and display of Search in the list below Results mE This field displays only when you use the Search button to look for certain VLANs Index This is the VLAN index number Click on an index number to view more VLAN details VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide LC Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 2 VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 40 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail VLAN Detail g VLAN Status Port Number VID 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 428 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 g 11 432 15 47 19 24 23 25 2f Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu U u U 1 3 22 07 Static Uu Uu Uu Uu U Uu Uu Uu U Uu
78. Port Method Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Lowest Queue spa 1 C wra p s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 2 C WFO h p 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 3 C WFO h n s 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR amp spa 4 C WFO f 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 5 C wra f 2 B 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR SPA 6 C wra f n 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR spa 7 C wraQ p 3 4 5 6 7 8 None C WRR Eo AMT uo a o x SEIT WRR Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 55 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This label shows the port you are configuring i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 217 Chapter 22 Queuing Method Table 55 Advanced Application Queuing Method continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select SPQ Strictly Priority Queuing WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing or WRR Weighted Round Robin Strictly Priority services queues based on priority only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q7 has the highest priority and QO the lowest Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each qu
79. RCI dim np cm UT 236 err General MYR CONIDOESISE sce aes ct ERR Pr d obUn ECC N qaa E UR Ede Rer h Ra E ae 237 eom puIEC EMI er 239 248 1 MXR Gonfisurablen EXSImpIB isa sinc cadnunansind annsin sd cmi a nnd tacto 240 Chapter 25 PAB 243 25 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting AAA seen 243 0 11 Lob USB CONE iussione aac adc toca neca e ecc p cnin edd e Kad 244 PNE RADIUS and iei cR 244 20 2 BAA Ell m 244 252 RADIUS SENGT GEID cede tct odii tnu edu op d Ead cx d Eo UD Eo a a 245 2032 DAURCO SOI GUID aescsosintetciiadtt ocium EEA 247 ee Fe T I OP 249 25 24 Vendor Specife ATIS aiiacisn onis aa da kan ua dnb 252 25 2 58 Tunnel Protocol ATPDLUIG iecit rechte ter e a Doe LEE E UD ERE UK 253 E23 Supported RADIUS FIEIDUIBS 12 cei aco RR PEE LER RR RD er cd diia cep ER pP cus 254 25 9 1 Attributes Used TOF AuthemicahOn osaacesckose du qae reed a Ek krx pu UE Ebrg uda RE un QU RR kot US CR RERO OR 254 25 3 2 Attributes Used for AGCOHDBIWE errico noa 255 Chapter 26 IP Sonte NR 259 25 T IP Saco GUANI LOCI WISE cisusesatenet idi nte a i a a oan Ga E GA ud 259 26 1 1 DHCF Shooping OYERE seinio iN O EN 260 20 12 ARP Inspection CuvebVieW ierant pr i A A aaa 262 pl Aa AE Ta Mec E T A E E terre re ree 263 26 9 IPF Source Guard Statie BID saisies e bre En treni det a a 264 SBSDHOP OOOD ai
80. STP RSTP Overview R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge and then the root bridge notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding Note In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 13 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 147 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 2 Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 26 STP Path Costs LJ I D Path Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 6553
81. Section 26 5 on page 269 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 273 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 6 ARP Inspection Status Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection 274 Figure 123 ARP Inspection Status Total number of filters 0 ORE VLAN Status Log Status Configure IPSG Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 83 ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field disp
82. Starting Address Size of Specify the size or count of the IP address pool The Switch can issue aie IP from 1 to 253 IP addresses to DHCP clients IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for the client IP pool Mask Default Enter the IP address of the default gateway device Gateway Primary Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to S DNS ar the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Relay Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP relay for this VLAN Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 aod Relay Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot Agent number port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays enman to a DHCP server Informati This read only field displays the system name you configure in the on General Setup screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN gr
83. Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 7 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on each untrusted port To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 127 ARP Inspection Port Configure ARP Inspection Port Configure Configure DA Lasst Rate pps pe interval seconds Untruste OO 1 TC 1 untrusted fs 2 untrusted fs ft 3 mnseaw 5 p o 5 5 a unsteaz tsi 5 Unused fs 5 p 0 17 s ___ Untrustea 5 Dh o 7 Untruste fs Poo 8 Untrusted v Emu ur au o PN c mue xd The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 87 ARP Inspection Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does n
84. Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration IP Interface Use these fields to create or edit IP routing domains on the Switch IP Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for Address example 192 168 1 1 This is the IP address of the Switch in an IP routing domain IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of an IP routing domain in dotted decimal Mask notation for example 255 255 255 0 VID Enter the VLAN identification number to which an IP routing domain belongs Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays IP address of the Switch in the IP domain IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch in the IP domain Mask VID This field displays the VLAN identification number of the IP domain on the Switch Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the
85. Switch waits for IGMP reports after the multicast router sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 63 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Fast Leave Enter an IGMP fast leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In fast leave mode right after receiving an IGMP leave message from a host on a port the Switch sends out an IGMP Group Specific Query GSQ message to determine whether other hosts connected to the port should remain in the specific multicast group This helps speed up the leave process This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received on this port from a host Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered i
86. TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1 Bit 12 bits 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 117 Chapter 9 VLAN switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed A broadcast frame or a multicast frame for a multicast group that is known by the system is duplicated only on ports that are members of the VID except the ingress port itself thus confining the broadcast to a specific domain 9 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 9 2 1 GARP GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 9 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaratio
87. Two r reeY lor marker C Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection DHCP Snooping VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling LLDP sFlow PPPoE IA ARP Learning CPUProtection Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 9 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 9 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 170 Management Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are Destination copied Port Enter the destination port or ports under the Destination label These are the ports which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example e 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Select which port settings configured in the Basic Setting menus should Setting be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings configured in the Advanced Application Application menus should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to b
88. Uu Uu Uu Uu The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application VLAN VLAN Detail LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or other added in another way such as via Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 9 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN To configure a XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN e ED Static VLAN Port VID Active Yes Control xe VLAN Status ACTIVE Oo Name VLAN Group ID Tagging s Normal M TxTagging 1 amp Normal C Fixed C Forbidden iv TxTaggin
89. VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the MAC address of the device is shown on the Switch s MAC Table It also shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC Table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port from which this source MAC address came The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 MAC Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame Figure 239 MAC Table Flowchart E in the Forward to all ports Is destination MAC address MAC Table Filter this frame port different from the Yes Is the outgoing incoming port Forward to outgoing port 50 2 Viewing the MAC Table Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen U
90. WRR Weighted Round Robin Scheduling 216 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 394 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide
91. Warning Messages sssessssrressssrresssesrnasrsnnnnssrnnnnnsnnnnnsssnennneena 416 46 9 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages ccssccceeesseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeenenneeees 417 AEA The Main COGEN Me wicca ds Seca a i E Ra O aS 419 46 10 Service Porn Access Control uouccsmusncienus opum E S rtis aa acd aaa EX d ud ud 419 46 11 Romolo ANTE 350 0 orent 420 Chapter 47 ui i AHO 423 CIS Dc TE I I I I YI T 423 Chapter 48 t 425 LINES eps o erdee rer eter Reece ler eer nr rrr tty rreaerrerterrey rem teen renee tre earn ree rere 425 28 2 WWD UI E Paga daba e palette ia Oba E E En UM UAR RE DIS DU 426 a5 3 590g Servel TOSS oa cease ut du aaa opum LA ue GU Kan ai ud haa DOR excu Y d a d E Dru Eas 427 pf Mur vs Loo e 428 Chapter 49 Cluster Mandgilii Laien inni cts aeo tta rh n asare AETA ETAN SERRE UM REAL MR aM RR ca MR LU IAS as 435 49 1 Clustering Management Status Overview sssssssssseesseeennenee ener 435 49 2 Cluster Marsoceiibhlt Statie auismeendu taped pU M Fort Eg ERE d OR E esum dd DRE M bV Ea B es DR UpRUS 436 49 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management sssssssssssses eene 437 49 3 Clustering Management Configuration sesssssssssseseeeeeeeenner ennt 440 Chapter 50 MAG o
92. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 You clicked the Save link on the Switch to have your settings take effect 6 3 How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch You want to configure PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch A to pass a subscriber s information to a PPPoE server S There is another switch B between switch A and server S Switch B is connected to switch A In this way PPPoE server S can identify subscriber C and may apply different settings to it Figure 29 Tutorial PPPoE Intermediate Agentt Tutorial Overview B ce _ S Ww Tren 12 Trusted N Port 11 Trusted 0 sesse ss C m Port 12 Trusted CES Port 5 Untrusted Note For related information about PPPoE IA see Section 31 3 on page 302 The settings in this tutorial are as follows Table 7 Settings in this Tutorial SWITCH PORT ctep VLAN CIRCUIT ID REMOTE ID FRFOE IA PORT A Port 5 to C 1 userC 00134900000A Untrusted Port 12 to B 1 N A N A Trusted B Port 11 to A 1 N A N A Trusted Port 12 to S 1 N A N A Trusted XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 3 1 Configuring Switch A 1 Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active then click Apply intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE circuit id Active go identifier string option spv bl delimiter v Reply Click Port on the top
93. a default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session for security reasons Figure 23 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Initial Setup Example This chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the example network Configure an IP interface Configure DHCP server settings Create a VLAN Set port VLAN ID Enable RIP 5 1 1 Configuring an IP Interface On a layer 3 switch an IP interface also known as an IP routing domain is not bound to a physical port The default IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 with a subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 In the example network since the RD network is already in the same IP interface as the Switch you don t need to create an IP interface for it However if you want to have the Sales network on a different r
94. are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 37 4 Configure OSPF Areas To ensure that the Switch receives only routing information from a trusted layer 3 devices activate authentication The OSPF supports three levels of authentication None no authentication is used Simple authenticate link state updates using an 8 printable ASCII character password MD5 authenticate link state updates using a 16 printable ASCII character password XGS 4526 4528F 4728F Users Guide 337 Chapter 37 OSPF To configure an area set the related fields in the OSPF Configuration screen Figure 163 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup OSPF Configuration NN Redistribute Interface Virtual Link Status Active Router ID 0 0 0 0 Distance 110 Apply Cancel P Name Area ID ES Authentication Stub Network name 0 0 0 0 None No Summary Default route cost 15 Add Cancel Clear P Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 118 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Enter a 32 bit ID that uses the format of an IP address in
95. backup router that is the master Disable preempt mode to prevent this from happening By default a layer 3 device with the same IP address as the virtual router will become the master router regardless of the preempt mode XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 375 Chapter 42 VRRP 42 3 3 Configuring VRRP Parameters After you set up an IP interface configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screen Figure 196 P Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters Active Name name Network 192 168 1 10 24 Virtual Router ID fi Adertisement Interval t Preempt Mode Iv Priority fico Uplink Gateway noon Primary Virtual IP nono Secondary Virtual IP noon Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 137 P Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this VRRP entry Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Network Select an IP domain to which this VRRP entry applies Virtual Router ID Select a virtual router number 1 to 7 for which this VRRP entry is created You can configure up to seven virtual routers for one network Advertisement Interval Specify the number of seconds between Hello message transmissions The default is 1 Preempt Mode Select this option to activate
96. based on the packet s destination MAC address Select src dst mac to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses Select src ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s source IP address Select dst ip to distribute traffic based on the packet s destination IP address Select src dst ip to distribute traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Note When you enable the port security feature on the Switch and configure port security settings for a port you cannot include the port in an active trunk group Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 17 2 on page 177 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link
97. below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This is the number of the VLAN mapping entry in the table Active This shows whether this entry is activated or not Name This is the descriptive name for this rule XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping Table 91 VLAN Mapping Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port number to which this rule is applied VID This is the customer VLAN ID in the incoming packets Translated VID This is the VLAN ID that replaces the customer VLAN ID in the tagged packets Priority This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling This chapter shows you how to configure layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Overview Layer 2 protocol tunneling L2PT is used on the service provider s edge devices L2PT allows edge switches 1 an
98. can increase a packet loss priority of a packet but it cannot XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 355 Chapter 40 Differentiated Services decrease it Packets that have been previously marked red or yellow can only be marked with an equal or higher packet loss priority Packets marked red high packet loss priority continue to be red without evaluation against the PIR or CIR Packets marked yellow can only be marked red or remain yellow so they are only evaluated against the PIR Only the packets marked green are first evaluated against the PIR and then if they don t exceed the PIR level are they evaluated against the CIR Figure 181 TRTCM Color aware Mode 40 3 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to apply marking rules or IEEE 802 1p priority mapping on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 182 IP Application gt DiffServ aUuucrtn GENE 2 rate 3 Color Marker DSCP Setting Active 3 Port Active a C c fF WN CPEB Oooo Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 126 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch Settings in this row apply
99. change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 477 Appendix B Legal Information 478 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which ca
100. connections Source IP Enter a source IP address in dotted decimal notation Address Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix vade Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Destination IP Enter a destination IP address in dotted decimal notation Address f Address Specify the address prefix by entering the number of ones in the subnet mask Prefix XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 49 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION vp Note You must select either UDP or TCP in the IP Protocol field before you configure the socket numbers Select Any to apply the rule to all TCP UDP protocol port numbers or select the second option and enter a TCP UDP protocol port number Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back
101. dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area A value of 0 0 0 0 indicates that this is a backbone also known as Area 0 You can create only one backbone area on the Switch Authenticati on Select an authentication method Simple or MD5 to activate authentication Select None default to disable authentication Usually interface s and virtual interface s should use the same authentication method as the associated area If interface s and virtual interface s use different authentication methods than the associated area the authentication methods are based on the interface s and virtual interface s settings Stub Select this option to set the area as a stub area Network If you enter 0 0 0 0 in the Area ID field the settings in the Stub Area fields are ignored No Select this option to set the Switch to not send receive LSAs Summary Default Specify a cost between 0 and 16777215 used to add a default route into Et a stub area for routes which are external to an OSPF domain If you do not set a route cost no default route is added XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 118 P Application gt OSPF Configuration Area Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to
102. dstmac T6 F src dst mac Y T7 Lj src dstmac I T8 src dstmac T9 F src dstmac T10 LJ src dstmac T11 g src dstmac T12 O src dstmac v Port Group 1 None 2 None v 3 None 4 Tl v 5 T2 S 6 None E None 8 None v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link Aggregation aggregation Setting Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 42 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria Select the outgoing traffic distribution type Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same link within the trunk By default the Switch uses the src dst mac distribution type If the Switch is behind a router the packet s destination or source MAC address will be changed In this case set the Switch to distribute traffic based on its IP address to make sure port trunking can work properly Select src mac to distribute traffic based on the packet s source MAC address Select dst mac to distribute traffic
103. feature Figure 82 Guest VLAN Example E we gt N H E 2 3 Internet gt s VLAN 100 Use this screen to enable and assign a guest VLAN to a port In the Port Authentication gt 802 1x screen click Guest Vlan to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 83 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN Guest Vlan 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num Oo MuHot vy 1 Fi 1 Mut Host w mp 2 o i _ MutiHost w 3 o 1 Muli Host w Lm 4 o 1 MutHost v 1 5 o 1 MHot a a 6 o 1 Muli Host rf 7 o 1 Multi Host T 8 o 1 Multi Host v 1 9 m 1 MuHot M a 10 Oo 1 MultitHost w ly D a wires wj ft 28 o 1 Mut Host 1 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x gt Guest VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them A
104. field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then yyyy mm dd appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall when many Saving Time countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Day
105. forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Querier Select this option to allow the Switch to send IGMP General Query messages to the VLANs with the multicast hosts attached Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide replace the priority Chapter 24 Multicast Table 63 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join Note If you enable IGMP filtering you must create and assign IGMP filtering profiles for the ports that you want to allow to join multicast groups Unknown Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown Multicast Frame multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Reserved Multicast Group The IP address range of 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 are reserved for multicasting on the local network only For example 224 0 0 1 is for all hosts on a local network segment and 224 0 0 9 is used
106. from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE 31 2 The PPPOoE Screen Use this screen to configure the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Click Click Here to go to the I ntermediate Agent screen Figure 143 Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent aul d Intermediate Agent Click here 31 3 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Use this screen to configure the Switch to give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 144 Advanced Application PPPoE Intermediate Agent D Intermediate Agent g Port VLAN PPPoE Active access node identifier circuit id Active L1 identifier string option spy delimiter v Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 100 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the PPPoE intermediate agent globally on the Switch access node Enter up to 20 ASCII characters to identify the PPPoE intermediate agent identifier H
107. groups without you having to manually configure them The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on up to 16 VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first 16 VLANs that send IGMP packets This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 24 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 24 1 on page 227 for more information on multicasting Figure 98 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Status Multicast Setting Index VID Port Multicast Group The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID Thi
108. gt Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch Delay second CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest
109. in the TOS field Select Replace the I P TOS with the 802 1p priority value to replace the TOS field with the value you configure in the Priority field Select Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame to set the DSCP field with the value you configure in the DSCP field XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 53 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Outgoing Select Send the packet to the mirror port to send the packet to the mirror port Select Send the packet to the egress port to send the packet to the egress port Metering Select Enable to activate bandwidth limitation on the traffic flow s then set the actions to be taken on out of profile packets Out of profile Select the action s to be performed for out of profile traffic action Select Drop the packet to discard the out of profile traffic Select Change the DSCP value to replace the DSCP field with the value specified in the Out of profile DSCP field Select Set Out Drop Precedence to mark out of profile traffic and drop it when network is congested Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to queue the frames that are marked to be dropped Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on
110. is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 26 on page 148 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration To configure MSTP ports click Port in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP screen Figure 68
111. is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 9 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting EOT Subnet Based Vian Pro
112. it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication 18 2 3 Activate MAC Authentication Use this screen to activate MAC authentication In the Port Authentication screen click MAC Authentication to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 84 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication ED MAC Authentication d Port Authentication Active O Name Prefix Password zyxel Timeout lo 2 onie wn y Wl xu ee Oe ae Active Anon Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit MAC authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Name Prefix Type the prefix that is appended to all MAC addresses sent to the RADIUS server for authentication You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters If you leave this field blank then only the MAC address of the client is forwarded to the RADIUS server Password Type the password the Switch sends alon
113. link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 VRRP 42 3 2 VRRP Parameters This section describes the VRRP parameters 42 3 2 1 Advertisement Interval The master router sends out Hello messages to let the other backup routers know that it is still up and running The time interval between sending the Hello messages is the advertisement interval By default a Hello message is sent out every second If the backup routers do not receive a Hello message from the master router after this interval expires it is assumed that the master router is down Then the backup router with the highest priority becomes the master router Note All routers participating in the virtual router must use the same advertisement interval 42 3 2 2 Priority Configure the priority level 1 to 254 to set which backup router to take over in case the master router goes down The backup router with the highest priority will take over The priority of the VRRP router that owns the IP address es associated with the virtual router is 255 42 3 2 3 Preempt Mode If the master router is unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router However when another backup router with a higher priority joins the network it will preempt the lower priority
114. modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration OEE ree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel Spanning Tree Mode XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree Mode You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Select Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 13 1 on page 147 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on RSTP Click RSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen Figure 63 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP
115. of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 479 Appendix B Legal Information 480 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index Numerics 802 1P priority 114 A access control limitations 397 login account 412 remote management 420 service port 419 SNMP 398 accounting setup 249 address learning MAC 127 129 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 381 451 455 456 administrator password 412 age 163 aggregator ID 181 183 aging time 109 applications bridging 27 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 29 switched workgroup 28 Area Border Router ABR 332 area ID and OSPF 338 ARP how it works 381 451 table 452 ARP Address Resolution Protocol 381 451 ARP inspection 259 262 and MAC filter 262 configuring 263 syslog messages 263 trusted ports 263 AS Boundary Router 332 authentication 338 and OSPF 337 Index and RADIUS 244 setup 249 authorization privilege levels 251 setup 249 automatic VLAN registration 118 Autonomous System and OSPF 331 Autonomous System AS 331 349 back up configuration file 393 Backbone Router BR 332 backbone routing 331 Backup Designated Router BDR and OSPF 333 bandwidth control 468 basic settings 101 basic setup tutorial 63 BDR Backup Designated Router 333 binding 259 binding table 259 building 259 BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units 148 Bridge Protocol Data Un
116. one virtual router VR1 to ensure the link between the host X and the uplink gateway G Host X is configured to use VR1 192 168 1 20 as the XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 371 Chapter 42 VRRP default gateway If switch A has a higher priority it is the master router Switch B having a lower priority is the backup router Figure 193 VRRP Example 1 192 168 1 1 a 172 21 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 10 8 172 21 1 10 B If switch A the master router is unavailable switch B takes over Traffic is then processed by switch B 42 2 VRRP Status Click IP Application gt VRRP in the navigation panel to display the VRRP Status screen as shown next Configuration Index Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive Poll Interval s 10 Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 135 IP Application gt VRRP Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of a rule Network This field displays the IP address and the subnet mask bits of an IP routing domain that is associated to a virtual router VRID This field displays the ID number of the virtual router 372 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 VRRP Table 135 IP Application gt VRRP Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VR Status This field displays the statu
117. out of band management port C An RS 232 management console port D A connector for the power receptacle E 3 2 2 XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F The following figures show the rear panels of the AC and DC power input model switches The rear panels contain A connector for the backup power supply A An optional slot B for installing an EM 422 or EM 412 uplink module Two stacking ports C An RJ 45 out of band management port D An RS 232 management console port E A connector for the power receptacle F A power switch G DC power input model only Figure 16 Rear Panel AC Model TER icu ids Es o o E s2 Q o Eis o Jo of Jo dea otzan iaat s p MGMT XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 17 Rear Panel DC Model ORO DC POWER INPUT 61 w io CONSOLE T Lid 3 id OOCO O Ijo o o t RIN RIN ay 48V 6 pee HEN OD eee tr 3 2 3 Uplink Module The following figure shows the front panel of the EM 422 and EM 412 modules Figure 18 The Front Panel of the EM 422 and EM 412 Modules LNK ACT EM 422 EM 412 3 2 4 Rear Panel
118. priority 3 for ARP traffic received on port 1 2 and 3 You can also have a protocol based VLAN B with priority 2 for Apple Talk traffic received on port 6 and 7 All upstream ARP traffic from port 1 2 and 3 will be grouped together and all upstream Apple Talk traffic from port 6 and 7 will be in another group and have higher priority than ARP traffic when they go through the uplink port to a backbone switch C Figure 45 Protocol Based VLAN Application Example 9 9 Configuring Protocol Based VLAN Click Protocol Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 46 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Vian Port Setting Name c IP Ethernet type C Others Hex VID oz Priority Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Protocol Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this protocol based VLAN Port Type a port number to be included in this protocol based VLAN This port must belong to a static VLAN in order to participate in a protocol based VLAN See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more details on setting up VLANs Name
119. root of the MST instance XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 14 1 14 1 1 Bandwidth Control This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen Bandwidth Control Overview Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port CIR and PIR The Committed Information Rate CIR is the guaranteed bandwidth for the incoming traffic flow on a port The Peak Information Rate PIR is the maximum bandwidth allowed for the incoming traffic flow on a port when there is no network congestion The CIR and PIR should be set for all ports that use the same uplink bandwidth If the CIR is reached packets are sent at the rate up to the PIR When network congestion occurs packets through the ingress port exceeding the CIR will be marked for drop Note The CIR should be less than the PIR Note The sum of CIRs cannot be greater than or equal to the uplink bandwidth XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 14 2 Bandwidth Control Setup Click Advanced Application Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to 170 bring up the screen as shown next Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control e Bandwidth Control J Active El Port casata teo Active Egress Rate Active Commit Rate Active Peak Rate Kbps O Kbps n Kbps 1 1 K ps 5 1 Kbps n K ps 2 rH 1 Kbps n 1
120. run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide m m Mirroring This chapter discusses port mirroring setup screens 16 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the monitor port without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Mirroring EOLIE Active L1 Monitor Port 1 Port Mirrored Direction f ri Ingress rH Ingress ri Ingress C Ingress 4 C Ingress Ci Ingress ri Ingress 5 Ingress Mn age MM OP a Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 175 Chapter 16 Mirroring 176 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate port mirroring on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Monitor The monitor port
121. save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 37 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table The bottom of the OSPF Configuration screen displays a summary table of all the OSPF areas you have configured Figure 164 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table Index Name Area ID Authentication Stub Network Delete 1 Example 192 168 1 1 None No DH Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 119 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an area Name This field displays the descriptive name of an area Area ID This field displays the area ID that uses the format of an IP address in dotted decimal notation that uniquely identifies an area An area ID of 0 0 0 0 indicates the backbone Authenticati on This field displays the authentication method used None Simple or MD5 Stub This field displays whether an area is a stub network Yes or not No Network Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 37 5 Configuring OSPF Redistribution Use this screen to configure route redistribution and summary
122. section to enable loop guard on the Switch Then select the Active option of the first entry port to enable loop guard for all ports Click Apply a oop Guard oon C OM amp WN e 11 SKS BSS ST S ST S S S ST S gig 8 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU Protection select ARP as the reason enter 100 as the rate limit packets per second for the first entry port to apply the setting to all ports Then click Apply Errdisable Port Rate Limit pkt s 1 10 j 2 100 ae eee 3 100 4 100 5 100 E jo o 7 100 8 100 9 100 10 100 11 100 12 100 42 10N 3 Click Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect select Active for cause ARP and inactive port as the mode Then click Apply Cause BPDU IGMP D Errdisable Detect Active Mode inactive port _ inactive port inactive port inactive port Errdisable v v FE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Click Advanced Application Errdisable Errdisable Recovery select Active and Timer Status for loopguard and ARP entries Also enter 180 180 seconds 3 minutes in the Interval field for both entries Then click Apply Errdisable Recovery Errdisable Active Reason Timer Status Interval i O
123. selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports An egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when
124. snooping This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for ARP inspection You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches The Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high The Switch learns dynamic bindings from trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers The Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the current bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high 26 1 1 2 DHCP Snooping Database The Switch stores the binding table in volatile memory If the Switch restarts it loads static bindings from permanent memory but loses the dynamic bindings in which case the devices in the network have to send DHCP requests again As a result it is recommended you configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database maintains the dynamic bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP
125. snooping statistics IGMP throttling XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 173 Switching Specifications continued AAA Support RADIUS and TACACS Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Static MAC address forwarding MAC Freeze Limiting number of dynamic addresses per port Intrusion lock IP source guard Static IP MAC binding DHCP snooping ARP inspection MAC authentication Guest VLAN PPPoE IA and option 82 Configurable ARP learning mode Management IEEE 802 3ah OAM IEEE 802 1AB LLDP IEEE 802 1ag CFM Loop guard Password encryption sFlow User access right Error disable The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 174 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1058 RIP 1 Routing Information Protocol RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II 470 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 174 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION
126. summary table Note Deleting all IP subnets locks you out of the Switch Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 7 Port Setup Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen Figure 36 Basic Setting Port Setup ED Port Setup NEP Port Active Name Type 1 a i 10 100 1000M 2 xl 10 100 1000M N n ks 106 26 x Ilii 10G 27 lt a 106 12G 28 106 12G a Speed Duplex Auto Auto Auto 4 4 G 10G Full Duplex 126 Full Duplex v How Control Priority c Pe I osm r ez Peer s co pa fe a r 0 om Pee E r es Pe sz 0 o gt Peer 0 5m m joz Pee 05mm Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 14 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This is the port index number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enab
127. table with both ARP replies gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests Therefore in the following example the Switch can learn host A s MAC address from the ARP request sent by host A The Switch then forwards host B s ICMP reply to host A right after getting host B s MAC address and ICMP reply E E b AX m A B ARP Request p P ARP Reply I CMP Request ARP Request ARP Reply ICMP Request ICMP Reply p I CMP Reply XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 ARP Learning 43 2 Configuring ARP Learning Click IP Application gt ARP Learning in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 208 IP Application gt ARP Learning CO rr teaming Port ARP Learning Mode ARP Reply v 1 ARP Reply 2 ARP Reply ji Y 3 ARP Reply v 4 ARP Repy v 5 ARP Repy 6 ARP Reply 7 ARP Reply v 8 ARP Repy v 9 ARP Reply 10 ARP Reply i 1 ARF r aM CSS iine The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 139 IP Application gt ARP Learning LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as
128. the Designated Router DR or the Backup Designated Router BDR You can assign a number between 0 and 255 A priority of 0 means that the router will not participate in router elections Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number for an interface Network This field displays the IP interface information Area ID This field displays the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Authenticati on This field displays the authentication method used Same as Area None Simple or MD5 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 121 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Key ID When the Authentication field displays MD5 this field displays the identification number of the key used Cost This field displays the interface cost used for calculating the routing table Priority This field displays the priority for this OSPF interface Delete Click Delete to remove the selecte
129. the IP table 51 1 IP Table Overview The IP Table screen shows how packets are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a VLAN group sends a packet which is forwarded to a port on the Switch the IP address of the device is shown on the Switch s IP Table The IP Table also shows whether the IP address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch The Switch uses the IP Table to determine how to forward packets See the following figure 1 TheSwitch examines a received packet and learns the port from which this source IP address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the packet s destination IP address matches a source P address already learned in the I P Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address then it forwards the packet to that port f the Switch has not already learned the port for this IP address then the packet is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 447 Chapter 51 IP Table f the Switch has already learned the port for this IP address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the packet Figure 241 IP Table Flowchart Is destination IP address in the IP Table Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to packet outgoing port 51 2 V
130. the PPPOE server Click Apply VLAN Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No O L1 1 Yes 6 3 2 Configuring Switch B The example uses another XGS 4728F as switch B 1 then click Apply Click Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent Select Active intermediate Agent Port VLAN PPPoE access node identifier XGS 4728F circuit id Active oO identifier string option spv delimiter v een Click Port on the top of the screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select Trusted for ports 11 and 12 and then click Apply 12D VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted isdem Untrusted EM Untrusted v Eas e co N D on de G2 KN I3 Ig c 7 a e o c a D a lt t 13 Untrusted x 44 Lintrietaci w Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen 3 The Intermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen intermediate Agent Port PPPoE Active access node identifier XGS 4728F circuit id Active Fi identifier string option spv v iade i delimiter v 76 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Enter 1 for bo
131. the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 25 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting System Events NAS P Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time 25 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 74 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS P Address v v v Service Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session ld v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 255 Chapter 25 AAA Table 75 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS IP Address v v v Service Type v v v
132. the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers MAC Address Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use this feature to have the Switch assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Classifier and Policy You can create a policy to define actions to be performed on a traffic flow grouped by a classifier according to specific criteria such as the IP address port number or protocol type etc Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Ro
133. the other side of the rack XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 35 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connections The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure8 Front Panel XGS 4526 100 1000 Mbps RJ 45 RJ 45 Gigabit Mini Ethernet Ports GBIC Dual Personality Figure9 Front Panel XGS 4528F EISE HERES TEE CEST ESTEE TEE TET ES Ld d Jon nno oj Rowe ooo d bannati a D D PERES o30 080 oh ne ne hal ne hal ne hal ne hal ofr h 75 hal A ohl ne hal ne hal ne 1H ne hal ne hal A h hal ne hal ne hal ne ud ne hal ne hal A fia A h IXGS 4728F cnonuoanuoaununuuouonuococunuunon naononganuauuagaounuonnunumu nauanunuaganuouononuununonunu YA F A FRA FOA FLA FOR YLR a o Y Y A FA FOR FOR FOR NR 0 Y AR Y amp YA YoA FoA FA FLA FLA Ww mado uA GATA tu ut mus Tu Sys uh Tee uA
134. the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices
135. the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 21 3 Viewing and Editing Policy Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Policy screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the I ndex field Figure 91 Advanced Application Policy Rule Summary Table Index Active 1 Yes Name Classifier s Delete Test Example rH Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 54 Policy Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the policy index number Click an index number to edit the policy Active This field displays Yes when policy is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the name you have assigned to this policy Classifier s This field displays the name s of the classifier to which this policy applies Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 212 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule 21 4 Policy Example The figure below shows an exa
136. to 32 printable ASCII characters for this static multicast MAC address forwarding rule This is for identification only MAC Address Enter a multicast MAC address which identifies the multicast group The last binary bit of the first octet pair in a multicast MAC address must be 1 For example the first octet pair 00000001 is 01 and 00000011 is 03 in hexadecimal so 01 00 5e 00 00 0A and 03 00 5e 00 00 27 are valid multicast MAC addresses VID You can forward frames with matching destination MAC address to port s within a VLAN group Enter the ID that identifies the VLAN group here If you don t have a specific target VLAN enter 1 Port Enter the port s where frames with destination MAC address that matched the entry above are forwarded You can enter multiple ports separated by no space comma or hyphen For example enter 3 5 for ports 3 4 and 5 Enter 3 5 7 for ports 3 5 and 7 Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to their last saved values Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static multicast MAC address rule for port s XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide
137. to define action s on the classified traffic flow See Chapter 21 on page 207 for information on configuring a policy rule XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 21 1 21 1 1 21 1 2 Policy Rule This chapter shows you how to configure policy rules Policy Rules Overview A classifier distinguishes traffic into flows based on the configured criteria refer to Chapter 20 on page 201 for more information A policy rule ensures that a traffic flow gets the requested treatment in the network DiffServ DiffServ Differentiated Services is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service TOS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure
138. to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 27 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the e
139. to that area Authenticati on Note OSPF Interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication method The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To participate in an OSPF network you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the associated area Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple and set the Key field to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using simple password authentication Select MD5 and set the Key ID and Key fields to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long Characters after the eighth character will be ignored When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Cost The interface cost is used for calculating the routing table Enter a number between 0 and 65535 The default interface cost is 15 Priority The priority you assign to the interface is used in router elections to decide which router is going to be
140. to the factory defaults 20 3 Viewing and Editing Classifier Configuration To view a summary of the classifier configuration scroll down to the summary table at the bottom of the Classifier screen To change the settings of a rule click a number in the Index field Note When two rules conflict with each other a higher layer rule has priority over a lower layer rule Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Classifier Summary Table Index Active Name Rule Delete 1 Yes Example EtherType IP SrcMac 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 SrcPort port 2 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 50 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to edit the rule Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only Rule This field displays a summary of the classifier rule s settings XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 50 Classifier Summary Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes The following table shows some other common Ethernet types and the corresponding protocol
141. ud supr iS VLA TYPE isstebpidenttrddaet caren ve dai beim ICE eis mustum dti cbRAD ERU aerate 120 PLS puoi mo Mmm 120 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 13 Table of Contents xu Eoo AE M 121 go vM EE aniona niao arka desit E SUnSac de bon ARESE AOA DAAA 122 9 54 Congue a SIE VLAN caeesendiecctonsci melior repetat trei pM era di oticc s e aces 122 2 5 4 Configure VLAN Port SEU asisten d handmade 124 ub oubna Based VLANS 2uadieu aid romper eI EA 126 Sy Connguimg Sibel Based YLAN gizcscssctesseacsnngicteteaeddacrtentse EEA E AEEA 127 ekan oele eer E a E A E AT T A A E Soxanuustsadns 128 9 9 Coniiguring Protocol Based VLAN sinesine aaee it 129 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Exempla onion obi Donor Ear LER RO Re DR pL S AR RO Rh 131 Oe Eo paced SLAN GONE iuonsupuentust passis tac a vnb en a 132 9 TL Congue a Port based VLAN 2icc eiecit reb epiac pb vei raai 132 Chapter 10 cud MAC Forward Sty A IT O 137 TOT o E C E E E NU TNI 197 18 2 Gonlguring static MAC Forwarding xesssexscsenisseteberiseseeemu eit pepe nta sie erida iea 137 Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup einn than rris sna trae the kk in Mua ada ERR a E En REC A RR KE aasi 141 TL1 Statie Multicast Forwarding CHOIVIEE iius a ERR iiinn at ER Rat ra RR bci dE tates 141 11 2 Gonfigarng Static Multicast Forwarding uusecssuexese p ortpudepbrt ete raa eU ppE
142. variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 46 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 46 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MI Bs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category An OID Object ID tha
143. want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh AAA Setup Use this screen to configure authentication authorization and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the AAA Setup link in the AAA screen to view the screen as shown Figure 114 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup OF ET ED AAA Authentication Type Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Privilege Enable local j Y Login local gt Authorization Type Active Method Exec O radius Dotlx m radius Accounting Update Period o minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System D 1 radius Exec Dn start stop radius j Dotix O 1 start stop radius Commands O O stop only tacacs Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 Advanced Application AAA AAA Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the S
144. would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number 3 Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priorit
145. 0 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 2 temperature returns to the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 voltage VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 1 voltage goes above or below the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 2 voltage returns to the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 1 Switch automatically resets 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 ControlledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the 1 2 1 Switch resets by an administrator through a d aaa LE management interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 146 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when th
146. 1 shows such unknown multicast frames flooded to all ports With static multicast forwarding you can forward these multicasts to port s within a VLAN group Figure 52 shows frames being forwarded to devices XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup connected to port 3 Figure 53 shows frames being forwarded to ports 2 and 3 within VLAN group 4 Figure 51 No Static Multicast Forwarding Figure 52 Static Multicast Forwarding to A Single Port c 11 2 Configuring Static Multicast Forwarding Use this screen to configure rules to forward specific multicast frames such as streaming or control frames to specific port s XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Click Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding Static Multicast Forwarding NP Active iil Name o MAC Address a mM m TM VID Port I Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Type a descriptive name up
147. 2 21 1 1 Default Gateway 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 20 192 168 1 10 172 21 1 10 B You want to set switch A as the master router Configure the VRRP parameters in the VRRP Configuration screens on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 199 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch A Active iv Name Example Network 192 168 1 1 24 J Virtual Router ID 1 Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode iv Priority no Uplink Gateway 172 21 1 100 Primary Virtual IP 32168120 Secondary Virtual IP noon EXAMP LE Figure 200 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Parameter Settings on Switch B Active Iv Name Example1 Network 192 168 1 10 24 Virtual Router ID 1 Advertisement Interval 1 Preempt Mode Iv Priority hoo Uplink Gateway z22113100 Primary Virtual IP 321681120 Secondary Virtual IP booo EXAMPLE 378 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 VRRP After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 201 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch A Aug NND Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive EXAMPLE Figure 202 VRRP Example 1 VRRP Status on Switch B Aud EMEND Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive EXAMPLE 42 4 2 Two Subn
148. 25 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels see the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting Note Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 249 Table 72 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format 252 XGS 4526 4528
149. 26 or XGS 4528F 0 means this feature is disabled Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Port This field displays the number of the port to which this rule is applied VID This is the VLAN ID number to which the port belongs Limit Number This is the maximum number of MAC addresses which a port can learn in a VLAN Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Classifier This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the packet classifier on the Switch 20 1 About the Classifier and QoS Quality of Service QoS refers to both a network s ability to deliver data with minimum delay and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth Without QoS all t
150. 3 1 3 on page 149 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Tagged This field shows the number of packets with VLAN tags transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received Unicast This field shows the number of good unicast packets received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of go
151. 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 14 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 15 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 16 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 17 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 18 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 19 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 a an Naum eroo Dieahind n n n nn nn nanan Clear Counter 46 10 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen Figure 229 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control L Service Access Control Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout ks Telnet SSH Ks FTP HTTP Ks TIE 3 Minutes HTTPS ICMP SNMP x E rw co SL XI Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 155 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding services that you want to allow to access the Switch Service For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTT
152. 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 25 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 26 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 27 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 28 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Ada Cancel Clear VLAN Status Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging Port Control 2 Normal 1 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden 3 Normal C Fixed Forbidden 4 Normal C Fixed Forbidden 5 Normal e C Forhidde M TxTaguing M TxTag ing v Tx Tagging Tx Tagging M Tx Tagging XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen VLAN Status J VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 49 52 07 Static 2 102 0 00 15 Static Change Pages Previous Next 9 Enter 102 in the PVI D field for port 2 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory ED VLAN Port Setting g GVRP E Port Ingress Check PVID m 1 1 D N d8 me eg ae r E E 4 i OF CE oO OFORO 4 a 0a oaa E Cc C 4 CO Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation O 3 O ii fs os ie iii
153. 5 Path Cost 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Path Cost 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Path Cost 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Path Cost 1Gbps 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Path Cost 10Gbps 1to5 1 to 65535 On each bridge the bridge communicates with the root through the root port The root port is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree network For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other
154. 728F User s Guide 267 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 79 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Successful transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from or updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed transfers This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from or update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Successful reads This field displays the number of times the Switch read bindings from the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed reads This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to read bindings from the DHCP snooping database Successful writes This field displays the number of times the Switch updated the bindings in the DHCP snooping database successfully Failed writes This field displays the number of times the Switch was unable to update the bindings in the DHCP snooping database Database detail First successful access This field displays the first time the Switch accessed the DHCP snooping database for any reason Last ignored bindings counters This section displays the number of times and the reasons the Switch ignored bindings the last time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Bindi
155. 728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 153 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt User continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for SNMP user authentication Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a wiae used but breakable Mn of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Password Enter the password of up to 32 ASCII characters for encrypting SNMP packets Group SNMP v3 adopts the concept of View based Access Control Model VACM group SNMP managers in one group are assigned common access rights to MIBs Specify in which SNMP group this user is admin Members of this group can perform all types of system configuration including the management of administrator accounts readwrite Members of this group have read and write rights meaning that the user can create and edit the MIBs on the Switch except the user account and AAA configuration readonly Members of this group have read rights only meaning the user can collect information from the Switch Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your
156. ABEL DESCRIPTION Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring SPVID SPVID is the service provider s VLAN ID the outer VLAN tag Enter the service provider ID from 1 to 4094 for frames received on this port See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information on VLAN ID Priority Select a priority level from O to 7 This is the service provider s priority level that adds to the frames received on this port 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 2 Selective Q in Q Selective Q in Q is VLAN based It allows the Switch to add different outer VLAN tags to the incoming frames received on one port according to their inner VLAN tags XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Note Selective Q in Q rules are only applied to single tagged frames received on the access ports If the incoming frames are untagged or single tagged but received on a tunnel port or cannot match any selective Q in Q rules the Switch applies the port based Q in Q rules to them Click Selective QinQ in the Advanced Application VLAN Stacking screen to
157. AC Forwarding addresses for a port These static MAC addresses do not age out Static This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static multicast Multicast MAC addresses for port s These static multicast MAC addresses do not Forwarding age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP MRSTP Protocol MSTP to prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum Control bandwidth allowed on a port Broadcast This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Storm Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link This link takes you to screen where you can logically aggregate physical Aggregation links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port Authentication authentication as well as MAC authentication for clients communicating via the Switch Port Security This link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Classifier This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to group packets based
158. AN Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking 12 groups up to 8 ports each 468 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 173 Switching Specifications continued Port All ports support port mirroring mirroring Supports port mirroring per IP TCP UDP Bandwidth Supports rate limiting at 64K increment control Supports CIR PIR for ingress bandwidth control Layer 3 Features IP Capability 1PV4 support 128 IP routing domains 2K IP address table in the XGS 4526 or XGS 4528F 8K IP address table in the XGS 4728F 512 routing paths in the XGS 4526 or XGS 4528F 8K routing paths in the XGS 4728F Wire speed IP forwarding IPv6 MLD snooping proxy XGS 4728F only DHCPv6 client and relay ICMPv6 IPv6 Path MTU NDP host and router IPv6 address stateless auto configuration host and router IPv6 static route Routing Unicast RIP V1 V2 OSPF V2 protocols Multicast DVMRP IGMP V1 V2 V3 Static Routing IP services DHCP relay VLAN based DHCP server relay Policy routing Load sharing 64 VRRP entries Filtering Support L2 MAC filtering L3 IP filtering Layer 4 TCP UDP socket Multicast IGMP snooping IGMP v1 v2 v3 16 VLAN maximum user configurable IGMP filtering 5 MVR entries IGMP timer Multicast reserve group Static multicast IGMP snooping fast leave IGMP
159. AN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 lt 41 0 0 3100 Error FAN2 4131 4169 4109 3100 Normal FAN3 2811 2821 2783 3100 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 2VIN 1 217 1 217 1 217 6 Normal 1 25VIN 1 248 1 248 1 248 1 6 Normal 1 8VIN 1 843 1 843 1 843 696 Normal 3 3VIN 3 360 3 360 3 360 6 Normal 12VIN 11 594 11 594 11 594 1096 Normal The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification Name purposes Product This field displays the model number of the Switch Model ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware Version including the date created Ethernet This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Address Switch Hardware Monitor Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and Unit reporting if the temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the temperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature BOARD PHY and MAC refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This shows the current temperature at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum tempera
160. Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port OUD MSTP D 6 a m oOo on C S S S S S S S ES ST S S S S C Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number F Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 34 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turne
161. Aggregation Setting gt LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol NN Link Aggregation Setting Active System Priority 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 o T2 v T3 vi T4 o T5 Li T6 EI T7 F T8 o T9 O T10 Oo T11 o T12 O Port LACP Timeout 30 v seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 Y seconds 3 30 Y seconds E 30 seconds 5 30 seconds 6 30 Y seconds 30 seconds ee ee eee Ree nel 28 30 seconds XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION eee Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with Priority the lowest system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Sel
162. B a Cornia EPBISP osos udis rod dat ibb tae tree co ce Tier tree err Terme rer rer re utc i pd 350 39 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages eescesueiene enne nekan tent naa 351 39 4 Default D VMBP Timer Val s auis eset ette sans pub mau Ett EE aE 352 Chapter 40 uiii A M 353 LUNES SCIRE i RN ERN T I T 353 420 11 DSGP and Per Hop BEIDE ausa eseiianteseevicsir bob tane preda at tes XH dti PpPrY tae S uci aet eta 353 40 1 2 Einmsarv Newark Example ausrsxbarpii ta eti adiit ag aad Ra boda Rants ada gd 354 40 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing cccscssesececeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeneeee 354 8027 TRTOM Color Blind ModE ici poe pucee epe Ece ven doce Ran Frsn ee ER aene ra Rae lect ER Erunt tenss 355 4022 TRTGM GColorzware MOUE d erred e Ex rx Ep eei Dn ag pe RE 355 ZB s Acn DIESE aicspiencuqaisecidisstneedsnab vu dette UcU Pep oat ob brdte tue un tab bored NN Red 356 40 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings sseesesseeeeee 357 40 4 DSGPIGIEEE 802 1p Prionty Settings esaserceodccin bie taces raped nbl aaa dubai 359 404 1 ooniigundg DOGP SOHO 2sccsdenbecztt edie euis dab b haut Io peaini bur qi dae res Duda gne rag 360 Chapter 41 361 LUMEPLS LES Ls aw 361 ZU LUBHSPNBUBE 2i tenue e ip udbiem OT
163. C Forbidden V Tx Tagging 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M Tx Tagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden V Tx Tagging 4 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden Iv Tx Taaging 5 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 6 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden Tx Tagging 7 C Normal Fixed C Forbidden TxTagging 8 Normal Cp C Forbidden M x Taggi Fixe f Tx Tagu ng Add P Cancel Clear XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting and set the PVID of the ports 5 6 and 7 to 100 This tags untagged incoming frames on ports 5 6 and 7 with the tag 100 c OMELETTE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP O Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation o jo wie z r 1 O fi ri Au z n ri 2 ri fi O Au O m 3 m fi rH all gt E O 4 m n far r 5 m Au D m 6 O All gt O O T m All r r 8 C fi all D Apply Cancel 4 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure activate and specify VLAN 100 as the DHCP VLAN as shown Click Apply Dnce Snooping Contiaure d Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active Iv bonia C Disable an 100 Database Agent URL Timeout interval 06 seconds Write delay interval sn seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew 5 Click the Port link at the top right corner DHCP Snooping
164. Calling Station Id v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session Id v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Terminate Cause v 25 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 76 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name v v v NAS IP Address v v v NAS Port v v v Class v v v Called Station Id v v v Calling Station Id v v v NAS Identifier v v v NAS Port Type v v v Acct Status Type v v v Acct Delay Time v v v Acct Session Id v v v Acct Authentic v v v Acct Input Octets v v Acct Output Octets v v Acct Session Time v v Acct Input Packets v v Acct Output Packets v v Acct Terminate Cause v XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 76 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP Acct Input Gigawords v Acct Output Gigawords v XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 257 Chapter 25 AAA XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network 26 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and una
165. Chapter 11 Static Multicast Forward Setup Table 24 Advanced Application gt Static Multicast Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field displays whether a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for a static multicast MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the multicast MAC address that identifies a multicast group VID This field displays the ID number of a VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Port This field displays the port s within a identified VLAN group to which frames containing the specified multicast MAC address will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 12 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Configure the Switch to filter traffic based on the traffic s source destination MAC addresses and or VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Filtering Filtering g Active C Name Discard source
166. Discard destination MAC d 2l T m VID Action Ada Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Action Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt Filtering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification only XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 12 Filtering Table 25 Advanced Application gt Flltering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Action Select Discard source to drop frames from the source MAC address specified in the MAC field The Switch can still send frames to the MAC address Select Discard destination to drop frames to the destination MAC address specified in the MAC address The Switch can still receive frames originating from the MAC address Select Discard source and Discard destination to block traffic to from the MAC address specified in the MAC field MAC Type a MAC address in a valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs VID Type the VLAN group identification number Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if
167. ESCRIPTION transceiver DDMI RxPowerEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 This trap is sent when one of ddm 2 1 the device operating DDMI TemperatureEventO parameters such as n D E transceiver temperature DDMITxBiasEventOn ia ee ae eet 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 ee DDMITxPowerEventOn 21 received optical power and ins transceiver supply voltage DDMI VoltageEventOn is above or below a factory set normal range DDMIRxPowerEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 This trap is sent when all 2 2 device operating parameters ear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 operating range 2 2 DDMITxBiasEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 DDMITxPowerEventClear 2 2 DDMI VoltageEventClear Table 148 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authenticatio authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when n authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEven 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when tOn 1 2 1 authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 password 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when there is ntOn 1 2 1 no response message from the RADIUS server 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 RADIUSNotReachableEve 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the ntC
168. E_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE RxPower Over Alarm High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE RxPower Over Warn High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE RxPower Under Alarm Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE RxPower Under Warn Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE SYSLOG_NOTICE Abnormal temperature state at port RFACE lt port gt has been cleared SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE SYSLOG_NOTICE Abnormal voltage state at port lt port gt RFACE has been cleared SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE SYSLOG_NOTICE Abnormal TX bias state at port lt port gt RFACE has been cleared SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE SYSLOG NOTICE Abnormal TX power state at port RFACE port has been cleared SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE SYSLOG NOTICE Abnormal RX power state at port RFACE port has been cleared SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG ALERT System has reset without management CH command SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG ALERT Another image was booted CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG CRITICAL 1 2VIN 1 8VIN 3 3VIN 2 5VIN gt CH voltage value value is lower than its limit voltage value XGS 4526
169. F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 72 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Vendor ID 890 Assignment Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv 1lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 25 2 5 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on EEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that these attributes only work when you enable authorization see Section 25 2 3 on page 249 Table 73 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch Note The bolded values in this table are fixed value
170. F User s Guide Chapter 38 IGMP 38 1 1 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is used by multicast hosts to indicate their multicast group membership to multicast routers Multicast routers can also use IGMP to periodically check if multicast hosts still want to receive transmission from a multicast server In other words multicast routers check if any hosts on their network are still members of a specific multicast group The Switch supports IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 version 2 IGMP v2 and IGMP version 3 I GMP v3 Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively At start up the Switch queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Switch periodically updates this information How IGMP Works This section describes how I GMP works and the changes it has gone through from version 1 to version 3 IGMP version 1 defines how a multicast router checks to see if any multicast hosts are part of a multicast group It checks for group membership by sending out an IGMP Query packet Hosts that are members of a multicast group reply with an IGMP Report packet This is also referred to as a join group request The multicast router then keeps a list of all networks that have members of this multicast group and forwards multicast traffic to that network Figure 169 IGMP Version 1 Example The main difference in IGMP version 2 is that it provides a mechanis
171. H HTTPS Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted computers XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 156 Management Access Control Remote Management continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 47 1 Diagnostic Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Diagnostic __ Figure 231 Management gt Diagnostic Resolving 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Reply from 192 168 1 23 Ping Host Successful 192 168 1 23 System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Port 1 Port Test Ethernet Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 157 Management Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the te
172. ICIEDICI o o 0 o GEIEIEIEIES B c o e gogogo o o s 0000000000 GOICECIEIES B o o ej BoogopmoaaosoopipiJiiuiuauaoaooopgiubiia ooa EIDIBIEIDOo s c o oBIBIDIBD E o 5 o c o BIBIDIEIES D C o er LICIDIEICIs a a a oEIDICIDIE o 5 5 c aEIEICIEIES B c a e naoaouospdpiggBaaoooogiduiijlgEgaooooBEB s 0000000000100 0r 000000111 0000mm pnosgouumBiEEmBDuoooouBEBEEEBaaoauooBELE s pnmguuupiliEm ocoooouoBEEBE apOopoououbbpp s gouonmagDBDBdlBgpo ooooULDEBE aoooagbgL s je 5 e e 2 8 8 x s S e 8 8 8 8 S S S R als 1011 12 13 14 15 16 177 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 23 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 22 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Choose All connected or Port isolation Wizard All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure After you make your
173. IGMP is a protocol used for joining or leaving a multicast group You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in Figure 175 on page 351 39 2 How DVMRP Works DVMRP uses the Reverse Path Multicasting RPM algorithm to generate an IP Multicast delivery tree Multicast packets are forwarded along these multicast tree branches DVMRP dynamically learns host membership information using Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP The trees are updated dynamically to track the membership of individual groups 1 Initially an advertisement multicast packet is broadcast B in the following figure 2 DVMRP enabled Layer 3 devices that do not have any hosts in their networks that belong to this multicast group send back a prune message P 3 If hosts later join the multicast group a graft message G to undo the prune is sent to the parent XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 DVMRP 4 The final multicast M after pruning and grafting is shown in the next figure Figure 173 How DVMRP Works Qc e9 CS wu 39 2 1 DVMRP Terminology DVMRP probes are used to discover other DVMRP Neighbors on a network DVMRP reports are used to exchange DVMRP source routing information These packets are used to build the DVMRP multicast routing table that is used to build source trees and also perform Reverse Path Forwarding RPF checks on incoming multicast packets RPF checks prevent dupl
174. IPSEC AH Authentication Header IPSEC TUNNEL tunneling protocol uses this service AIM New I CQ TCP 5190 AOL s Internet Messenger service It is also used as a listening port by ICQ AUTH TCP 113 Authentication protocol used by some servers BGP TCP 179 Border Gateway Protocol BOOTP CLIENT UDP 68 DHCP Client BOOTP SERVER UDP 67 DHCP Server CU SEEME TCP 7648 A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software UDP 24032 DNS TCP UDP 53 Domain Name Server a service that matches web names for example www zyxel com to IP numbers XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 473 Appendix A Common Services 474 Table 175 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION ESP User Defined 50 The IPSEC ESP Encapsulation IPSEC TUNNEL Security Protocol tunneling protocol uses this service FINGER TCP 79 Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on FTP TCP 20 File Transfer Program a program to enable fast transfer of files including TCP 21 large files that may not be possible by e mail H 323 TCP 1720 NetMeeting uses this protocol HTTP TCP 80 Hyper Text Transfer Protocol a client server protocol for the world wide web HTTPS TCP 443 HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e commerce ICMP User Defined 1 Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for d
175. IT SYSLOG INFO System bootup CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO System init completed CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Save system configuration successfully CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Save system configuration index CH successfully SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Save system configuration failed CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Upgrade system firmware successfully CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Upgrade system firmware failed CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Restore system configuration CH successfully XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG INFO Load factory default configuration CH successfully SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE Gets the time and date from a time CH server successfully SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE PethPse Port OnOff Trap CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE PethPse Main Power Usage On Trap CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE PethPse Main Power Usage Off Trap CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE System cold start CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE System warm start CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE System has reset due to a CH management command SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE Port port loopguard CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG N
176. LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable layer 2 protocol tunneling on the Switch Destination Specify an MAC address with which the Switch uses to encapsulate the MAC Address layer 2 protocol packets by replacing the destination MAC address in the packets Note The MAC address can be either a unicast MAC address or multicast MAC address If you use a unicast MAC address make sure the MAC address does not exist in the address table of a switch on the service provider s network Note All the edge switches in the service provider s network should be set to use the same MAC address for encapsulation Port This field displays the port number XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Table 92 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them CDP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol packets so that other Cisco devices can be discovered through the service provider s network STP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel STP Spanning Tree Protocol packets so that STP can run properly across the service provider s network and spanning trees can be set up
177. Location Type the geographic location of your Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed Contact Type the name of the person in charge of this Switch You can use up to 32 printable ASCII characters spaces are allowed XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use Time Type the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time Server when servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to Bootup find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 Time Server IP Address Type the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This
178. N Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These users have read only access You can give users higher privileges via the CLI For more information on assigning privileges see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide User Name Set a user name up to 32 ASCII characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 46 5 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 222 SSH Communication Example n Internet SSH Server CAZ en SSH Client XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 6 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts Figure 223 How SSH Works TN Internet 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server Th
179. N identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Table 23 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Static Multicast Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static multicast address forwarding 11 1 Static Multicast Forwarding Overview A multicast MAC address is the MAC address of a member of a multicast group A static multicast address is a multicast MAC address that has been manually entered in the multicast table Static multicast addresses do not age out Static multicast forwarding allows you the administrator to forward multicast frames to a member without the member having to join the group first If a multicast group has no members then the switch will either flood the multicast frames to all ports or drop them You can configure this in the Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting screen see Section 24 3 on page 229 Figure 5
180. NING 802 1x Egress bandwidth lt bandwidth gt is out of range User name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Bandwidth conflicts with current link aggregation settings User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING RADIUS Accounting change RADIUS accounting server from lt index gt to lt index gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING RADIUS Accounting server lt index gt becomes reachable SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING RADIUS Accounting server lt index gt is unreachable SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG WARNING RADIUS Authentication change RADIUS server from lt index gt to lt index gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING RADIUS server lt index gt is unreachable SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING RADIUS server lt index gt becomes reachable SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING Invalid Service Type USER lt username gt XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING Privilege out of range USER username SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING TACAS account server index becomes reachable SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING TACAS account server index is unreachable SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG WARNING
181. OCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION TELNET TCP 23 Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the Internet and in UNIX environments It operates over TCP IP networks Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems TFTP UDP 69 Trivial File Transfer Protocol is an Internet file transfer protocol similar to FTP but uses the UDP User Datagram Protocol rather than TCP Transmission Control Protocol VDOLI VE TCP 7000 Another videoconferencing solution XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2011 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to
182. OTICE External alarm input lt index gt CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG_NOTICE External alarm input lt index gt clear CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE System reboot CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE MSTP instance instance ID new root CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE MSTP instance instance ID topology CH changes SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE Switch becomes MRSTP tree lt index gt CH new root SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE MRSTP tree lt index gt topology changes CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE Switch becomes the STP new root CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG NOTICE STP topology changes CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG WARNING mac MAC address gt vlan VLAN ID CH ip IP address gt port port count count last update time timestamp SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG WARNING MAC address table is full CH SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG WARNING MAC address table is recovered to CH normal state SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT SYSLOG WARNING Hardware host table is full CH XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG_WARNING Port lt port gt link speed and duplex mode autonegotiation has failed SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG_WARNING Port lt port gt link speed and duplex mode autonegotiation has recovered to normal state SP_SYSLOG_
183. Obtepiti brce td Qu eue QINd Pp eM RN Du QN NE bees 361 213 2 DHCP Conouiauon DIOS 2 tcccsen ed bod cese iue sue in ren SERE EI cctie at Eras Ed EuRUS 361 aL DE PSU ducatu sa tpa dci Ee pUaU rene iOS a ren dO Eau Y oci uas Fut nr tire 362 JLS DHCP Server Slats ENSIS issotesentutindtten od rescue t oniaredee rx Ma ERO TRU AA 362 A DRG AS e TE P 364 41 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Inrormialigli auxuzosdasxen n duncrad onibus sau nier a a ect Dea 364 21 4 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay sirasini etn Encoder pater ee conieci bae pan 365 41 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example ssssseeeeeee 366 415 Gonnguring DHOP VLAN SiS dasnesesecitesteerxadai tese aegre cepi E RE E Prec tu BS Pu PY ABER iaaii 367 41 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLAMS sciciecciossiotsncseiadeninencconsansrseadiimnideanenebinig 369 Chapter 42 Dj e CREEK 371 22 0 VEINTE IO C ecdagsis ad oup RL ELIT a Ld R DP MAIO eda ERU doe euaaii tran Rb RN 371 A352 VIP SIUE uccisi ce perte eet best RUE Queue e ies Ei t M ElamaR GA A Ra 372 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents esc VRRP COMI ecu ec 373 ST IP ITA ODD ra Site a anes cera Fera ita Sundin crx dead d ON rs ate ts Ra Eug 373 agg VRRP PAME quisssswineobimeste tisse ln tencces epar colas eoi ERR Hue aia 375 42 2 0 Gordlgudng VRRP Para lt His 3 rra e e Rer pb Rie RA rtu eda ir RP E er 376 42 3 4 Goniguring VRRP TBISIIBDBIB 6siscndsaetpep iive enin S Baer
184. One of the LEDs does not behave as expected Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED See Section 3 3 on page 45 Check the hardware connections See Section 3 1 on page 37 Inspect your cables for damage Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor 55 2 Switch Access and Login forgot the IP address for the Switch 1 2 3 The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 Use the console port to log in to the Switch Use the MGMT port to log in to the Switch the default IP address of the MGMT port is 192 168 0 1 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 54 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting forgot the username and or password 1 The default username is admin and the default password is 1234 2 If this does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 54 cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator 1 Make sure you are using the correct IP address The default in band IP address is 192 168 1 1 f you changed the IP address use t
185. PS services you may change the default Port service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle timeouts may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 46 11 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control screen Figure 230 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management OLS NN Access Control Secured Client Setup Entry Active Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 1 v 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v v v v v
186. RP Learning You can configure the Switch to update the ARP table with with an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request and or an APR request Load Sharing Load sharing allows the Switch to forward packets destined to the same device through different routing paths of equal path cost XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 467 Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 173 Switching Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 8K MAC addresses in the XGS 4526 or XGS 4528F 16K MAC addresses in the XGS 4728F Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 144 Gbps non blocking Maximum frame size 9 k bytes Forwarding frame EEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet II PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree capability 4 configurable trees IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol BPDU transparency Smart isolation QoS IEEE 802 1p Eight priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Rule based traffic mirroring IEEE 802 3x flow control TRTCM VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1K static maximum Supports GVRP Double tagging for VLAN stacking Protocol Based VLAN Subnet Based VLAN Selective Q in Q VLAN translation mapping Private VL
187. RP table entry number the corresponding MAC address below IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with learned IP address is the Switch s management IP address MAC This is the MAC address of the device with the corresponding IP address Address above VID This field displays the VLAN to which the device belongs Port This field displays the port to which the device connects CPU means this Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Routing Table This chapter introduces the routing table 53 1 Overview The routing table contains the route information to the network s that the Switch can reach The Switch automatically updates the routing table with the RIP information received from other Ethernet devices 53 2 Viewing the Routing Table Status Use this screen to view routing table information Click Management gt Routing Table in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 244 Management gt Routing Table SEO SS Index Destination 1 192 158 1 0 24 2 10 10 10 0 24 Gateway 192 168 1 1 10 10 10 1 Interface Metric 192 168 1 1 1 10 10 10 1 1 Type STATIC STATIC The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 169 Management gt Routing Table
188. Security Table 47 Advanced Application Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC Learning address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active with address learning enabled Limited Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may Number of be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 Learned MAC then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access Address port 2 at any one time A sixth device must wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses ages out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 16384 in the XGS 4728F and from 0 to 8192 in the XGS 4526 or XGS 4528F 0 means this feature is disabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring
189. Select VLAN Type e TEs NEN amp 802410 VLAN Type C Port Based 9 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent to a VLAN group as normal depending on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 5 1 VLAN Status See Section 9 1 on page 117 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 39 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Change Pages D VLAN Status g VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID Search The Number of VLAN 1 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 0 52 21 Static Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Search Enter an existing VLAN ID number s separated by a comma and click by VID Search to display only the specified VLAN s in the list below Leave this field blank and click Search to display all VLANs configured on the Switch The Number This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch of VLAN The
190. Selected VLAN Start VID End VID Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 ARP Inspection VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN range Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to look at in the section below Enabled VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs on which ARP inspection is enabled in the section below Selected VLAN Select this to look at all the VLANs in a specific range in the section below Then enter the lowest VLAN ID Start VID and the highest VLAN ID End VI D you want to look at Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above Received This field displays the total number of ARP packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Request This field displays the total number of ARP Request packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Reply This field displays the total number of ARP Reply packets received from the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Forwarded This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch forwarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted Dropped This field displays the total number of ARP packets the Switch discarded for the VLAN since the Switch last restarted XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 275 Chapter 26 IP So
191. Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response before re sending an identity request to the client Supp Timeout Specify the number of seconds the Switch waits for client s response to a challenge request before sending another request Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 18 2 2 Guest VLAN When 802 1x port authentication is enabled on the Switch and its ports clients that do not have the correct credentials are blocked from using the port s You can configure your Switch to have one VLAN that acts as a guest VLAN If you enable the guest VLAN 102 in the example on a port 2 in the example the user A in the example that is not IEEE 802 1x capable or fails to enter the correct username and password can still access the port but traffic from the user is forwarded to the guest VLAN That is unauthenticated users can have access to limited network resources in the same guest VLAN such as the Internet The XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication rights granted to the Guest VLAN depends on how the network administrator configures switches or routers with the guest network
192. Subnet Mask 090 0 Default Gateway 0 09 0 Primary DNS Server RIRIA Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 172231 0 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information rH Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete t Relay 192 168 1 100 r Delete Cancel EXAMPLE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide VRRP This chapter shows you how to configure and monitor the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP on the Switch 42 1 VRRP Overview Each host on a network is configured to send packets to a statically configured default gateway this Switch The default gateway can become a single point of failure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available In VRRP a virtual router VR represents a number of physical layer 3 devices An IP address is associated with the virtual router A layer 3 device having the same IP address is the preferred master router while the other Layer 3 devices are the backup routers The master router forwards traffic for the virtual router When the master router becomes unavailable a backup router assumes the role of the master router until the master router comes back up and takes over The following figure shows a VRRP network example with the switches A and B implementing
193. Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 48 on page 425 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 26 1 2 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure DHCP snooping See Section 26 1 1 4 on page 261 Note It is recommended you enable DHCP snooping at least one day before you enable ARP inspection so that the Switch has enough time to build the binding table 2 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 3 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second 26 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Bindings are used by DHCP snooping and ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard the bindings by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 117 IP Source Guard ONE TETED Static Binding DHCP Snooping Arp Inspection Index Mac Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port 1 a1 12 12 12 12 01 172 23 37 222 inifinity sta
194. T4 src dst mac 15 src dst mac T6 src dst mac T7 src dst mac T8 src dst mac T9 src dst mac T10 src dst mac T11 src dst mac T12 src dst mac The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Group ID This field displays the group ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Port These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group The port number s displays only when this trunk group is activated and there is a port belonging to this group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link Ports in this trunk group Aggregator Link Aggregator ID consists of the following system priority MAC ID address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 17 2 1 on page 178 for more information on this field The ID displays only when there is a port belonging to this trunk group and LACP is also enabled for this group XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 179 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation Table 41 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Criteria This shows the outgoing traffic distribution algorithm used in this trunk group Packets from the same source and or to the same destination are sent over the same
195. TE TDI DD DILDTTDITLET 319 AE LET SL T 323 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 9 Contents Overview zz e T M P 327 Oo Bl Sane ere ree Cee E VO born ac cs Rien eran rx A seca rey Dres td Ue E 331 MIP seared cease O ise A Sg se ie bane aia ace aly is de Medco poner E peas 345 Bir RS D LL S DIET 349 D9terenmiateu Ss IB onc sped icit ORE Pede pend RR PER DG c meos etr OBL PY du dts Pup gea ERA Bep 353 pe E E E T E 361 DEEP eee E 371 ARF LO up TET TUTUP 381 Bek esp E EL E LI 387 VESTI durzlp MEN EE EE ED ED DO ENDO DS 389 tercio g pr 397 B prop 423 II ETC T DL SL CST SEPTIES RT 425 Cluster nr M 435 XXL TOI AE A E E ideato as tuU odi essc o vobi A du c e S t Da UD UU IDA D RD CK CUL EN Gd 443 lu oce TE 447 i Tale MM 451 gc TNC crm 453 TANS e nad cates te cased e a i E hnanis 455 TPR SUS FACIES spans cs saavhve da eins 1 LL 457 mus Pace CIN CAIUS IS doprinio E eA 463 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users Guide 3 D u ument Conventio OY O A AA AA 5 c lk 1 S ass eaaa ra a E Ea Eiaa a a a a 7 geri
196. TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG_WARNING CFM MEP ID lt identifier gt with MA Index index and MD Index lt index gt has no defects SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG_WARNING CFM MEP ID lt index gt with MA Index lt index gt and MD Index lt index gt has XconCCM defect ErrorCCM defect RemoteCCM defect MACstatus defect RDICCM defect SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG WARNING RMON falling alarm SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG WARNING PoE overload event port lt port gt SP SYSLOG TYPE SWIT CH SYSLOG WARNING PoE short circuit event port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_SWIT CH SYSLOG_WARNING PoE over system budget event port lt port gt XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Cluster Management This chapter introduces cluster management 49 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one Switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 162 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Maximum number of cluster 24 members Cluster Member Models Cluster member models must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The cluster manager is the Switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members Cluster members are the switches being m
197. This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before Delay changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number e Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row ar
198. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F Intelligent Layer 3 Switch Default Login Details IP Address http 192 168 0 1 Out of band MGMT port http 192 168 1 1 In band ports User Name admin Password 1234 Firmware Version 4 00 Edition 1 03 2011 www zyxel com Copyright 2011 ZyXEL Communications Corporation About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to configure the Switch using the web configurator Related Documentation Web Configurator Online Help The embedded Web Help contains descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Command Reference Guide The Command Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI and CLI commands to configure the Switch Note It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Support Disc Refer to the included CD for support documents Documentation Feedback Send your comments questions or suggestions to techwriters zyxel com tw Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road Il Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 30099 Taiwan Need More Help More help is available at www zyxel com EET c sammen s Download Library gt Firmware Knowledge Base Software Glossary Driver Support amp Feedback Datasheet Warranty Information Tech Doc Overview ZyXEL Windows Vista Support Us
199. XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 The DHCP Snooping Port Configure screen appears Select Trusted in the Server Trusted state field for port 5 because the DHCP server is connected to port 5 Keep ports 6 and 7 Untrusted because they are connected to DHCP clients Click Apply DHCP Snooping Port Configure Server Trusted state Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted Untrusted gt Configure Rate pps TTT Cancel 7 Goto Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP snooping gt Configure gt VLAN show VLAN 100 by entering 100 in the Start VID and End VI D fields and click Apply Then select Yes in the Enabled field of the VLAN 100 entry shown at the bottom section of the screen If you want to add more information in the DHCP request packets such as source VLAN ID or system name you can also select the Option82 and I nformation fields in the entry See Section 26 1 1 3 on page 261 3 Snooping A Show VLAN VID Enabled Option82 Information No ri C 100 r1 m ontigure Start VID fioo Configure End VID fioo 8 Click Save at the top right corner of the web configurator to save the configuration permanently Save M Status A Logout H Help XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 9 Connect your DHCP server to port 5 and a computer as DHCP cli
200. a a x mE tede NE 331 37 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas esses eterne 331 ors PE VIDES ater cuo ete oco octo mto oes tone Eecio por eet mre caen Poss eSd 332 37 1 3 Interfaces and Virtual Links oo cece cece ecceeeeeeseeecesseeeesseueseeaesesuuaeeesaeeeeeeeseees 332 37 L4 OSPF and Router EIBOIIDIIS encarenar A dod 2515 GONO OSP isis deri Gabpd Hartera rms o ea Haga ba eot roba dada HE 333 S eA RE ursmtusossadisui AA kx ew das Lot tad Dru ocx dac Esa club 334 I7 OSPF ire gp eC eS 336 OF A Comoe SPP AAS aiiin aN bae nada a Ud A Eb EM DLP e a Rd 337 97 4 1 View OSPF Area Information Table 5 rdi ette reae nk Ya eu ae e 339 crc denn pstpeg ici aci caelis dianian areae a Ei 339 27 5 CU OSPF III AE sisitan aiaa iaa cale bns zi da epa ea 341 arg OSPF VINES endi dre Mie UD dae Te a DIM Dep ni eppPT id id he defun 343 Chapter 38 K E o tnt ert eter emt 345 CN BETIS 345 20 L1 How IGMP Woka asec ache a gnc eee tose bee visage reco urAcM e e e MU DLL ILLE 346 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents anc Purpbssedg IGMP oneness oci ar bra da acp daa Ga eA Ll a a apo 347 toda e Frye iz 1s uet ETE 348 Chapter 39 yj liu 349 S DON TARP Oe OW m 349 202 FON AP ORS ssc sous HT 349 ccd DINEE EINO O aani acs QUI S dindaned eascdazoleceedaueane Gicameaieettads 350 B
201. a only sFlow can continuously monitor network traffic and create reports for network performance analysis and troubleshooting For example you can use it to know which IP address or which type of traffic caused network congestion Figure 140 sFlow Application sFlow Agent EH N Em Nm sFlow Collector XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow 30 2 sFlow Port Configuration Click Advanced Application gt sFlow in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 141 Advanced Application gt sFlow xui HN Active Collector L1 Sample rate poll interval Collector Address 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 32768 120 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 93 Advanced Application sFlow LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable the sFlow agent on the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on
202. a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to allow the Switch to monitor traffic on this port and generate and send sFlow datagram to the specified collector XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 30 sFlow Table 93 Advanced Application sFlow continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Sample rate Enter a number N from 256 to 65535 The Switch captures every one out of N packets for this port and creates sFlow datagram poll interval Specify a time interval from 20 to 120 in seconds the Switch waits before sending the sFlow datagram and packet counters for this port to the collector Collector Address Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Note You must have the sFlow collector already configured in the sFlow Collector screen The sFlow collector does not need to be in the same subnet as the Switch but it must be accessible from the Switch Note Configure UDP port 6343 the default on a NAT router to allow port forwarding if the collector is behind a NAT router Configure a firewall rule for UDP port 6343 the default to allow incoming traffic if the collector is behind a firewall Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the n
203. aa A R a 266 26 5 DHCP Snooping Cangir sencami e E dta E OE a 269 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Pert Comi gUrE sucus iepoccusssit iria anad aa ecc pcd a uoc e 271 20 5 2 DHCP Snoop VLAN Congre sisaria aad pal 272 20 6 ARP Mnapection MAS ert 274 20 6 1 ARP inspection VLAN SUUS dictos nib or diete aD in OR dS Beda ra bees 275 200 ARP Inspeccion Log SIUS s ccisveancensscanesenspiuave tene i 276 cM dis eic rhea eli aeania aea AEE EE aia 277 25 7 1 ARP Inspacuon Port CONUS micsinassnsananois ai Se am GE sho de bah aa adus 279 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN CODIDUEIG 4 5 diptternisdst seb Undo eot odis Eee aE aiii 280 Chapter 27 Fit A A 1 700 Y A A n 283 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents zrAUMES DER EDIEUC C IUCr T 283 cR STEIN e ccr cec P Dp eorr TENET 285 Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping H 287 MEUS ri aen 287 25 1 1 VLSH Mapping Example uus sodas onddded cabcadar sc s crar dps cadat kd sni cubana nda dn raa Exil 287 ie Meu TLAN er pr o o UU UT 288 BB a Goto SEAT MISI orbi Pb e re rer ad eB cri TR ebore e HR ERE 289 Chapter 29 Laver 2 Protocol Tunne ng REC C C 291 29 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling CIVarVieW asset cscseioasi soviegaccausvscsauesaaicgeceazeasantaeevicaetresiadagnibass 291 29 1 1 Layer Z Protocol Tunneling Mod incecsecicei rectae rena preci per a 292 28 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunnelig uu cisseussn ci tie
204. abase Delay timer expiry This field displays how much longer in seconds the Switch tries to complete the current update before it gives up It displays Not Running if the Switch is not updating the DHCP snooping database right now Abort timer expiry This field displays when in seconds the Switch is going to update the DHCP snooping database again It displays Not Running if the current bindings have not changed since the last update This section displays information about the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database Last succeeded time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database successfully Last failed time This field displays the last time the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully Last failed reason This field displays the reason the Switch updated the DHCP snooping database unsuccessfully This section displays historical information about the number of times the Switch successfully or unsuccessfully read or updated the DHCP snooping database Total attempts This field displays the number of times the Switch has tried to access the DHCP snooping database for any reason Startup failures This field displays the number of times the Switch could not create or read the DHCP snooping database when the Switch started up or a new URL is configured for the DHCP snooping database XGS 4526 4528F 4
205. addresses Route redistribution is used when other routers which use RIP routing protocol and or static routes need to exchange routing information with the Switch using OSPF entries in order to reduce the routing table size XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide routing protocol A summary address is used to cover more than one routing Chapter 37 OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Redistribute to display the OSPF Redistribution screen Figure 165 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute Index OFS d p Configure Redistribute Route Active Type Metric value RIP r ERES 15 Static O hz 15 Summary address Subnet mask Apply Cancel Add Cancel Summary address Subnet mask Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 120 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute LABEL DESCRIPTION Redistribute Route Route redistribution allows your Switch to import and translate external routes learned through RIP routing protocol or configured manually Static into the OSPF network transparently Active Select this option to activate route redistribution for routes learned through the selected protocol Type Select 1 for routing protocols such as RIP whose external metrics are directly comparable to the internal OSPF cost When selecting a path the internal OSPF cost is added to the AB boundary router
206. ai E Eaa RE RA aaa T 37 3 1 1 Dual Personality InfelfaogS 1uiuuuccecs ce rer ner rentrer poete rrr n siana upra Rech 38 SIG OUD Betts PETS Gon dene odcenitbviibud i e bungetis Bre tion Dd ena eua ior PO 38 A aa EMER SIGS oni 39 22 cuc M 41 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EN Table of Contents cu irc lnc M TC P 41 See Ae AE Ae 1 mcr 41 9 23 Uplink p e XG nnww 0 G X 42 22 Haar Fano CONDES ono qe eoa eec arp bond MGR AG ded ates 42 do Payer COSE SE dettes nisi nEN PER RESP Oca Edi tod Eae Fee I ctepioEeu dd Pub C taRE E SOY DEDE ORE did 43 3 2 0 External Backup Power Supply COnPeetot goscincccscicccdciedecinensdccenanentdictonmtedeqssenencovans 44 EXNGIS sig MD TETTE 44 Tg Ape MT 45 Chapter 4 li 1 X 9 47 Cono 3 T I 47 prex cu nave ME re ET 47 A3 The Web Configurator Layout aps isenedeiceac cv reinaan aa UN Pec RN Reed 48 31 Change FOLE PASSWORD quuusousxienetuu peace dict iS tuti EEUU Ea SR a EY de i utut 53 AA Gaang Your DW JUI Oi oani a ETA 54 cR RU ep LOERT arpar E A A M 54 205 ROSEN Ihe SWIET acidi bosses dhodi ipti arii nudata cci dus am la epi Onde das ESNEA 54 4 6 1 Reload the Conflauralion FIIO 2 rro rectos iere toe cese EY eet deme na rmv ES 55 4 7 Logging Ouror the Web ConiQuralor iori een d deir cn Reb a RR Od ep RR PCOR A HD 56
207. algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth 22 1 1 Strictly Priority Strictly Priority SP services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q7 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q6 is transmitted until Q6 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q5 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SP does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 22 1 2 Weighted Fair Queuing Weighted Fair Queuing is used to guarantee each queue s minimum bandwidth based on its bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field when there is traffic congestion WFQ is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights By default the weight for QO is 1 for Q1 is 2 for Q2 is 3 and so on The weights range from 1 to 15 and the actual guaranteed bandwidth is calculated as follows XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 215 Chapter 22 Queuing Method 2 Weight 1 x 10 KB If the we
208. an learn up to 16 VLANs including up to five VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 64 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use
209. anaged by the cluster manager switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members Figure 234 Clustering Application Example 49 2 Cluster Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen Note A cluster can only have one manager Figure 235 Management gt Cluster Management t Status Configuration emer Status Manager Manager 00 13 49 01 1fb0 The Number Of Member 1 Index MacAddr Name Model Status PA 00 13 49 aefb 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR Online XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 163 Management Cluster Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The of Member following fields describe the cluster member switches In
210. anagement of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 47 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 45 8 on page 393 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 46 3 on page 398 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the password Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 31 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 32 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to insta
211. anel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 7 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Configure VLAN Figure 128 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure ARF Inspection VLAN Configure g VLAN Start VID Apply VID Enabled End VID Log None Confiqure Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 88 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Enabled Select Yes
212. ange Action Setthe packets TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1p priority value Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing CI Send the packet to the mirror port C Send the packet to the egress port Metering CI Enable Drop the packet Change the DSCP value Set Out Drop Precedence Out of profile action E o a r1 Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Add Cancel Clear The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 53 Advanced Application gt Policy Rule LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable the policy Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Table 53 Advanced Application Policy Rule continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Classifier s This field displays the active classifier s you configure in the Classifier screen Select the classifier s to which this policy rule applies To select more than one classifier press SHIFT and select the choices at the same time Parameters Set the fields below for this policy You only have to set the field s that is related to the action s you configure in the Action field General Egress Type the number of an outgoing port Port Priority Specify a priority level DSCP Specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number b
213. aniawimensiaiies 393 458 1 Pilfarame Loneebtti EB srcima Nee 393 45 8 2 FTP Command Line Procgduie iuc eorr aE c S aca den 394 230 2 TASSO FTP CEE sails saute casita sis raaa GPad du ded aepC Uu DO RR Ra Odd led 395 SO AR FTP BEBSIOOUDIS orisirisii aaa ans e rn eR a bed o Des a REDE 395 Chapter 46 li Rc 397 5 7 Aveese CONC CUBIVIBW iosssscinconsadibun apad ends a cadat bas add eet d 397 46 2 The Access Control Main Screan sisioso erri itdst ees uui dgteee tu tado bed Dldue bee es qd dde DUE INO dae iai 397 zig ier er e T MTM 398 25 3 1 SNMP OS and OCDE asiatica gis Gis UU diat Ludo vat Go comica ba aiaa 399 25 3 2 Gupported MIES iius eecis ite aE E E ai NS 399 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 2 Table of Contents sS D M c Receipt 400 Eu Ka ees cubo 407 45 3 5 Contiguriig SNMP Tiap GOUD oec eiectus oe cnt wee sinet ances 409 45 8 Conigunng SNMP LIBBE een bic peo S rb E attest Gadd tle abana 410 AG A Seung Up Login RECOUNTS eootiutesediteb sssin E dci tere AEE 412 LE mcs A IVORVIGW em 413 SB E EON SSH NOKE oaa aa bOdddidlamni di ASAA a prd dde btc dn CR 414 486 7 SSH Implementation ern the Sultehi csecscssessioicceaietesasstiaanvadsearscinsasineeseidossaneiagseneadceaonesess 415 46 7 1 Hegaements tor USING SSH 2er end pato e reo oie Deep d dde 415 a0 BOUTON TOA TENTE aaa E E a 415 MES PT PS EXAMS e UE 416 46 9 1 Internet Explorer
214. are marked via TRTCM green Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with low packet loss priority yellow Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with medium packet loss priority red Specify the DSCP value to use for packets with high packet loss priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 4 DSCP to IEEE 802 1p Priority Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE 802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE 802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping Table 128 Default DSCP IEEE 802 1p Mapping DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE 802 1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Differentiated Services 40 4 1 Configuring DSCP Settings To change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 184 P Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting OPEC ET NND Diffserv DSCP to 802
215. as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All Tag Only Frame Type and Untag Only Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped Select Untag Only to accept only untagged frames on this port All tagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through the Switch Isolation Select this to allows this port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the ports on which the isolation feature is not enabled Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide per Chapter 9 VLAN 9 6 Subnet Based VLANs Subnet based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the source IP subnet you specify When a frame is received on a
216. ase T port are connected at the same time the 1000Base T port will be disabled 3 1 2 1000Base T Ports The Switch has 24 1000Base T auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 100 1000 Mbps Gigabit Ethernet the speed can be 100 Mbps or 1000 Mbps The duplex mode can be both half or full duplex at 100 Mbps and full duplex only at 1000 Mbps An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 100 1000 Mbps and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MDI X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control Off 3 1 3 Mini GBIC Slots These are 4 or 24 slots for Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver Use a transceiver to connect a fiber optic cable to the Switch The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Transceiver Multisource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s I NF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to E
217. asts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 52 ARP Table 52 2 The ARP Table Screen Click Management ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s and remove specific dynamic ARP entries Figure 243 Management ARP Table CARP Table O all IP Address 0 0 0 0 Condition a7 Wh Audrass Port Cancel Index IP Address MAC Address VID Port Type 1 10 122 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 1 0 static 2 192 168 1 2 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 1 0 static 3 192 168 1103 00 21 85 0c 44 4b 1 8 dynamic 4 192 168 102 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 102 0 static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 168 Management gt ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Specify how you want the Switch to remove ARP entries when you click Flush learned with the specified IP address learned on the specified port Select All to remove all of the dynamic entries from the ARP table Select I P Address and enter an IP address to remove the dynamic entries Select Port and enter a port number to remove the dynamic entries Flush Click Flush to remove the ARP entries according to the condition you specified Cancel Click Cancel to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the A
218. at Defined in WT 101 SubOpt Length Value Access Space eth Space Slot Port No VLAN Node ID ID Identifier 1 3 e 1 2 1 byte byte byte 1 byte byte byte 4 20 byte byte bytes 31 1 3 Port State Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for the PPPoE intermediate agent This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping or ARP inspection You can also specify the agent sub options circuit ID and remote ID that the Switch adds to PADI and PADR packets from PPPoE clients Trusted ports are connected to PPPoE servers f a PADO PPPoE Active Discovery Offer PADS PPPoE Active Discovery Session confirmation or PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate packet is sent from a PPPoE server and received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to all other ports f a PADI or PADR packet is sent from a PPPoE client but received on a trusted port the Switch forwards it to other trusted port s Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE discovery packets if you enable the PPPoE intermediate agent and there are no trusted ports Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers f a PADI PADR or PADT packet is sent from a PPPoE client and received on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent
219. atch a pre configured VLAN mapping rule The Switch translates the VLAN ID from 12 into 123 before forwarding the packets Any packets carrying a VLAN tag other than 12 such as 10 and received on port 3 will be dropped Figure 134 VLAN mapping example p E Service Provider Network P XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 287 Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 2 Enabling VLAN Mapping Click Advanced Application and then VLAN Mapping in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown 288 Figure 135 VLAN Mapping ED VLAN Mapping EE VLAN Mapping Configure Active C Port Active COO io ooo ooo Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 90 VLAN Mapping LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable VLAN mapping on the Switch Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the VLAN mapping feature on this port Clear this check box to disable the VLAN mapping feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatil
220. ate VLAN screen select Active Enter a descriptive name PrivateVLAN123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN ID field List the port s that can communicate with any port in VLAN 123 5 in this example Then other ports in this VLAN 2 3 and 4 for example will be added to the isolated port list and cannot send traffic to each other Click Add CE Private VLAN Active Name PrivateVLAN123 VLAN ID 123 Promiscuous Ports 5 Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name VLAN Promiscuous Ports Delete Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently From port 2 3 or 4 you should be able to access the device that attachs to port 5 such as a server or default gateway XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 7 How to Configure Routing Policy The Switch checks the routing table and then forwards traffic through the default gateway R1 based on the destination address This example shows you how to configure policy route to send traffic that matches a layer 3 classifier to a different gateway R2 for special treatment The layer 3 classifier groups packets marked with DSCP value 58 into a flow Packets marked with different DSCP values such as 13 are forwarded to the default gateway The Switch applies policy based routing rules to incoming packets prior to the normal routing Es wu b 6 7 1 Create a Layer 3 Class
221. ating directly Click Apply to save your settings 132 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following screen shows users on a port based all connected VLAN configuration Figure 48 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected Incoming All connected x Setting Wizard aj ajm 9 e ajajaja s s 5 8 2 4 8 e 8 a S 5 S B RRR 22 gt S BIBIBIDID e 6 9 9 S BIBIBIBIBI o1 amp 10 BIBIBIBIG s amp amp 5000000000 000RRR5555 p p BJ DJ B 3 63 63 3 a b 6 6 9 BIBIBIBIBI E b 6 6 e BIBT S p p BJ EYEE 63 63 63 3 a b 6 6 S BIBIBIBIBI 9 b 6 6 6 IBTIBTIB S BIB B B SBIBIBJbIB s 9 6 9 SBIBJBIBIPI 9 e 6 6 6 BJIBTDI b DJGIJBIBIDB e o BIBIBIBIDI a oo oO BIBIBIDID o1 6 61 amp RRR e e e BJBJDBIDIDI e m BJBTBTPIBI oo amp DJBIDJDBID BTBJBJBIBI 8 5 5 8 5 S m m BARR m GICIGIGIG ooo oR RRR m p p p 5 AA 9 a 5 69 aAA E b 6 9 A S BB m B BPBIBIBIBII s SHES 9TIBIBIBIBII amp o 6 6 89 S BS Bs BJ BJ B B5 BIBJIBIBIBIJBI S e 61 6 9 IBJIBJBTBII Foxes 89 6 8 63 53 By EIBIEIEIE s amp m amp S EJETEIISIES m e 8 9 E e 8 m e BIBIBIBID oo oR BIBTBIBIBI S amp amp m BJBJBIBIB sso BJBJBTBIBI m m eRe m m BIBIBIBID ooo GIGICIGIG m BIBTBIBIDI S amp amp RRs
222. ave link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager Figure 219 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group Trap Destination IP Type System O Interface AAA IP Switch A SNMP Setting Options coldstart C warmstart C fanspeed C temperature C voltage reset C timesync intrusionlock loopguard errdisable C linkup C linkdown C autonegotiation C idp C transceiver ddm C authentication C accounting C ping C traceroute C stp C mactable C rmon C cn The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 152 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination IP Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type
223. ave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 102 MVR Network Example VLAN2 sittin isses sees liess 2252 QU p 1 VLAN3 x 4 W a 2 2 0 bs a t i 9 24 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast traffic XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EJ Chapter 24 Multicast 24 6 2 24 6 3 Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN How MVR Works The following figure shows a mult
224. based on bridge information from all local and remote networks VTP Select this option to have the Switch tunnel VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets so that all customer switches can use consistent VLAN configuration through the service provider s network Point to Point The Switch supports PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol and UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection tunneling for a point to point topology Both PAgP and UDLD are Cisco s proprietary data link layer protocols PAgP is similar to LACP and used to set up a logical aggregation of Ethernet ports automatically UDLD is to determine the link s physical status and detect a unidirectional link PAGP Select this option to have the Switch send PAgP packets to a peer to automatically negotiate and build a logical port aggregation LACP Select this option to have the Switch send LACP packets to a peer to dynamically creates and manages trunk groups UDLD Select this option to have the Switch send UDLD packets to a peer s port it connected to monitor the physical status of a link Mode Select Access to have the Switch encapsulate the incoming layer 2 protocol packets and forward them to the tunnel port s Select Access for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Note You can enable L2PT services for STP LACP VTP CDP UDLD and PAGP on the access port s only Select Tunnel for egr
225. ber of an IP interface XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 RIP Table 112 IP Application gt RIP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Network This field displays the IP interface configured on the Switch Refer to the section on IP Setup for more information on configuring IP domains Direction Select the RIP direction from the drop down list box Choices are Outgoing Incoming Both and None Version Select the RIP version from the drop down list box Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 36 RIP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide OSPF This chapter describes the OSPF Open Shortest Path First routing protocol and shows you how to configure OSPF 37 1 OSPF Overview OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF offers some advantages over traditional vector space rout
226. bin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Switch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 172 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management IP Multicast With IP multicast the Switch delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody In addition the Switch can send packets to Ethernet devices that are not VLAN aware by untagging removing the VLAN tags IP multicast packets RIP RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to exc
227. bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 45 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure ok N A c Launch the FTP client on your computer Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch Press ENTER when prompted for a username the default is admin Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the Switch to your computer and renames it to config c
228. bnet based VLAN Active This field shows whether the subnet based VLAN is active or not Name This field shows the name the subnet based VLAN IP This field shows the IP address of the subnet for this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits This field shows the subnet mask in bit number format for this subnet based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the frames which belong to this subnet based VLAN Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this subnet based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the subnet based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 9 8 Protocol Based VLANs Protocol based VLANs allow you to group traffic into logical VLANs based on the protocol you specify When an upstream frame is received on a port configured for a protocol based VLAN the Switch checks if a tag is added already and its protocol The untagged packets of the same protocol are then placed in the same protocol based VLAN One advantage of using protocol based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic of the same protocol Note Protocol based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN For example ports 1 2 3 and 4 belong to static VLAN 100 and ports 4 5 6 7 belong to static VLAN 120 You can configure a protocol based VLAN A with
229. bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 27 STP Port States COTE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 13 1 4 Multiple RSTP MRSTP Multiple RSTP is ZyXEL s proprietary feature that is compatible with RSTP and STP With MRSTP you can have more than one spanning tree on your Switch and assign port s to each tree Each spanning tree operates independently with its own bridge information In the following example there are two RSTP instances MRSTP 1 and MRSTP2 on switch A Figure 56 MRSTP Network Example To set up MRSTP activate MRSTP on the Switch and specify which port s belong to which spanning tree XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Pro
230. can choose to drop control packets that exceed the specified rate limit or disable a port on which the packets are received 32 2 Error Disable Recovery Overview Some features such as loop guard or CPU protection allow the Switch to shut down a port or discard specific packets on a port when an error is detected on the port For example if the Switch detects that packets sent out the port s loop back to the Switch the Switch can shut down the port s automatically After that you need to enable the port s or allow the packets on a port manually via the web configurator or the commands With error disable recovery you can set the disabled port s to become active or start receiving the packets again after the time interval you specify XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable 32 3 The Error Disable Screen Use this screen to configure error disable related settings Click Advanced Application Errdisable in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 148 Advanced Application gt Errdisable a Xciutrul CPU protection Click here Errdisable Detect Click here Errdisable Recovery Click here 32 4 CPU Protection Configuration Use this screen to limit the maximum number of control packets ARP BPDU and or IGMP that the Switch can receive or transmit on a port Click the Click Here link next to CPU protection in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display th
231. cation gt Static Routing Eo NHNEA Active Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric r e 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Index Active Name 1 Yes Example Add Cancel Clear Gateway Address Metric Delete 192 168 1 2 2 T Destination Address Subnet Mask 172 21 1 1 255 255 0 0 Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels you use to create a static route Table 108 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Destination This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination P Address Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for dir
232. ce and OSPF 332 Internal Router IR 332 Internet Protocol version 6 see IPv6 introduction 27 IP capability 469 interface 110 373 routing domain 110 services 469 setup 110 IP multicast example 345 IP source guard 259 ARP inspection 259 262 DHCP snooping 259 260 static bindings 259 P table 447 how it works 447 IPv6 30 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 30 ping 30 L L2PT 291 access port 292 CDP 291 configuration 293 encapsulation 291 LACP 291 MAC address 291 mode 292 overview 291 PAgP 291 point to point 291 STP 291 tunnel port 292 UDLD 291 VTP 291 LACP 177 294 system priority 184 timeout 184 layer 2 features 468 Layer 2 protocol tunneling see L2PT layer 3 features 469 LEDs 45 limit MAC address learning 199 Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP 177 link aggregation 177 dynamic 177 ID information 178 setup 181 183 status 179 traffic distribution algorithm 180 traffic distribution type 182 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index link state database 332 335 lockout 54 log 423 login 47 password 53 login account Administrator 412 non administrator 412 login accounts 412 configuring via web configurator 412 multiple 412 number of 412 login password 413 loop guard 283 how it works 284 port shut down 285 probe packet 284 loop guard vs STP 283 LSA Link State Advertisement 332 MAC Media Access Control 102 MAC address 102 381 451 maximum number per port 199 200 MAC address lear
233. ch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports You can also specify the maximum number for DHCP packets that each port trusted or untrusted can receive each second To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt Port Figure 121 DHCP Snooping Port Configure E DHCP Snooping Port Configure Configure Port Server Trusted state Rate pps Untrusted Untrustod B Uncrusted B ot E o Apply Cancel TUE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 271 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 81 DHCP Snooping Port Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Server Trusted state Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted Trusted ports are connected to DHCP servers or other switches and the Switch discards DHCP packets from trusted ports only if the rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Untrusted ports are connected to subscribers and the Switch discards DHCP packets from untrusted ports in the following situations The packet is a DHCP server packet for example OFFER ACK or NACK The source MAC address and source IP address in the packet do not match any of the curren
234. change routing information with other routers The Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the Switch will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives Incoming the Switch will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Outgoing the Switch will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the Switch will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Switch sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M send the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting 36 1 1 Administrative Distance When two or more than two different routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF provide multiple routes to the same destination the Switch can use the administrative distance of the route to determine which routing protocol to use and add the route to the routing table The lower the administrative distance value is the more preferable the routing protocol is If two routes have the same administrative distance value the Switch
235. ckets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received 1518 that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1519 octets and the maximum frame size The maximum frame size varies depending on your switch model See Chapter 56 on page 463 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 8 1 Overview The System I nfo screen displays general Switch informati
236. configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another sFlow sFlow allows the Switch to monitor traffic in a network by getting sample data and packet statistics from traffic and send information to an sFlow collector for analysis PPPoE IA With the PPPoE Intermediate Agent enabled the Switch can give a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client CPU Protection You can limit the rate of protocol control packets such as ARP BPDU and or IGMP to be delivered to the CPU on a port Error Disable You can set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error You can also configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone Private VLAN You can set the Switch to prevent communications between ports in a VLAN to do port isolation within a VLAN Policy Routing Policy routing lets you override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the pre defined policy A
237. ctive Select this checkbox to enable the guest VLAN feature on this port Clients that fail authentication are placed in the guest VLAN and can receive limited services Guest Vlan A guest VLAN is a pre configured VLAN on the Switch that allows non authenticated users to access limited network resources through the Switch You must also enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on the Switch and the associated ports Enter the number that identifies the guest VLAN Make sure this is a VLAN recognized in your network Host mode Specify how the Switch authenticates users when more than one user connect to the port using a hub Select Multi Host to authenticate only the first user that connects to this port If the first user enters the correct credential any other users are allowed to access the port without authentication If the first user fails to enter the correct credential they are all put in the guest VLAN Once the first user who did authentication logs out or disconnects from the port rest of the users are blocked until a user does the authentication process again Select Multi Secure to authenticate each user that connects to this port Multi Secure If you set Host mode to Multi Secure specify the maximum number Num of users between 1 and 24 that the Switch will authenticate on this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if
238. d 2 in the following figure to tunnel layer 2 STP Spanning Tree Protocol CDP Cisco Discovery Protocol and VTP VLAN Trunking Protocol packets between customer switches A B and C in the following figure connected through the service provider s network The edge switch encapsulates layer 2 protocol packets with a specific MAC address before sending them across the service provider s network to other edge switches Figure 137 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Network Scenario Service Provider s i Network L In the following example if you enable L2PT for STP you can have switches A B C and D in the same spanning tree even though switch A is not directly connected to switches B C and D Topology change information can be propagated throughout the service provider s network To emulate a point to point topology between two customer switches at different sites such as A and B you can enable protocol tunneling on edge switches 1 and XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 2 for PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol LACP or UDLD UniDirectional Link Detection Figure 138 L2PT Network Example coc 2 oc iB A D Service Provider s Network C 29 1 1 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Mode Each port can have two layer 2 protocol tunneling modes Access and Tunnel The Access port is an ingress port on the service provider s edge device 1 or 2 in Figure 138 on page 292 and connected to a custom
239. d displays the router ID of the neighbor Pri This field displays the priority of the neighbor This number is used in the designated router election State This field displays the state of the neighbor backup or DR designated router Dead Time This field displays the dead time in seconds Address This field displays the IP address of a neighbor Interface This field displays the MAC address of a device Link State Database Link ID This field displays the ID of a router or subnet ADV Router This field displays the IP address of the layer 3 device that sends the LSAs XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 335 Chapter 37 OSPF Table 116 OSPF Status Common Output Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Age This field displays the time in seconds since the last LSA was sent Seq This field displays the link sequence number of the LSA Checksum This field displays the checksum value of the LSA Link Count This field displays the number of links in the LSA 37 3 OSPF Configuration Use this screen to activate OSPF and set general settings Click IP Application gt OSPF and the Configuration link to display the OSPF Configuration screen See Section 37 1 on page 331 for more information on OSPF Figure 162 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration Activating and General Settings OFT Redistribute Interface Virtual Link Status Active Router ID
240. d entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 37 7 OSPF Virtual Links Configure and view virtual link settings in this screen See Section 37 1 on page 331 for more information on OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Virtual Link to display the screen as shown next Figure 167 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link OSPF Virtual Link END Configuration Name name Area ID No Configured Aree ld Peer Router ID nono Authentication Noe H kyo Ro Key La Add Cancel Clear Index Name Peer Router ID Authentication Key ID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 122 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface to that area Peer Router Enter the ID of a peer border router ID XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 122 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Virtual Link continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Authenticatio n Note Virtual interface s must use the same authentication method within the same area Select an authentication met
241. d off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 9 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 5 on page 150 for more information on MSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MSTP CST Bridge Bridge ID Hello Time second Max Age second Forwarding Delay second Cost to Bridge Port ID Configuration Name Revision Number Configuration Digest Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Instance Instance 0 MSTI 1 x Bridge Bridge ID Internal Cost Port ID Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Root Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 0 2 0 20 0 15 0 0 0x0000 0x0000 001349000002 0 A317523DB32DA2D62 0 0 VLAN 1 4093 Regional Root Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 0 0 0x0000 0x0000 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol
242. d then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cluster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 49 Cluster Management XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 50 1 MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports When a device which may belong to a
243. dex You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the I ndex column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 236 on page 438 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 49 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 437 Chapter 49 Cluster Management configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 236 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen f Application IP Application Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table IP Table ARP Table Routing Table Configure Clone Basic Setting System Info
244. dge of your network Figure 129 Loop Guard vs STP I Li E Li Li Li E E i Loop Guard Ne wmm mmm POLLO UY PA See eee eee eee eee 9 Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messages loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are
245. displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 26 7 on page 277 276 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 85 ARP Inspection Log Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated dhcp deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a dynamic binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID dhcp permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a dynamic binding static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP I nspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 26 7 2 on page 280 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 26 7 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the leng
246. e Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start This field displays the starting IP address of the multicast group Address End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete Select Delete All or Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the checkbox es in the table 24 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 106 MVR Configuration Example me ea eae a a News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Multicast VID 200 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 iii S y XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports Figure 107 MVR Configuration Example OD Multicast Setting Group Configuration
247. e Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server Ck intrusionlo IntrusionLockEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port errdisable errdisableDetect Ole oa eO eOje g e Oo rFPO NO NO NO m n o eO 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 1 30 4 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 30 4 1 This trap is sent when an error is detected on a port such as a loop occurs or the rate limit for specific control packets is exceeded errdisableRecovery 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 1 30 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 1 30 4 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 1 30 4 2 This trap is sent when the Switch ceases the action taken on a port such as shutting down the port or discarding packets on the port after the specified recovery interval XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 147 SNMP InterfaceTraps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet li
248. e 463 for a full list of software features available on the Switch 1 1 1 Bridging Example In this example the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch You can provide a XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch super fast uplink connection by using the optional 10 Gigabit uplink module on the Switch Figure 1 Bridging Application Sy A ool ED A ER 5555 1 1 2 High Performance Switching Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two geographically dispersed networks that need high bandwidth In the following example a company uses the optional 10 Gigabit uplink modules to connect the headquarters to a branch office network Within the headquarters network a company can use trunking to group several physical ports into one logical higher capacity link Trunking can be used if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Figure 2 High Performance Switching 10 Gbps T ZL e oo 0 N Branch 4 ill 5 E 4 a t XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 Gigabit Ethernet to the
249. e Rule Configuration link in the Policy Route screen to create a rule in this profile xc Active Profile Name To_R2 Index Active Add Cancel Clear Profile name Rule Configuration Delete 4 Select the name of the profile with which the rule associates Set the rule s index number to 1 in the Sequence field Select Permit to have the Switch send matched traffic to the specified gateway Select the name of the layer 3 classifier to which the rule applies Enter the IP address of gateway R2 in the Next Hop field 10 1 2 3 in this example Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory LADLE Profile Configuration Profile Name Sequence E 9 Permit Deny DSCP58 Add Cancel Clear Seq State Classifier Statement Classifier Action Next Hop 0123 i Active Profile name Yes To R2 Rule Delete 5 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide PART Il Technical Reference System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 7 1 Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary with links to each port showing statistical details 7 2 Port Status Summary To view the port statistics click Status i
250. e Switch See Section 8 6 on page 110 for information on how to do this Figure 190 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN OREINEN VID Serer C Relay 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Status Server Client IP Pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Relay Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I option 22 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Information Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete 2 Server 192 168 2 100 66 C Delete Cancel Status The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 134 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply DHCP Status Select whether the Switch should function as a DHCP Server or Relay for the specified VID If you select Server then fields related to DHCP relay configuration are grayed out and vice versa XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 367 Chapter 41 DHCP Table 134 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Use this section if you want to configure the Switch to function as a DHCP server for this VLAN Suche IP Specify the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Poo
251. e Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 69 Advanced Application gt AAA gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Appl
252. e an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry P Address Enter the I P address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do SO XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 70 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you
253. e cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 3 LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table3 LEDs LED COLO sTATUS DESCRIPTION BPS Green Blinking The system is receiving power from the backup power supply On The backup power supply is connected and active Off The backup power supply is not ready or not active PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally S1 Green On The Switch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 1 XGS r r n 4528F or Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the XGS stack on Stacking Port 1 4728F S2 Green On The Switch is connected to other switches in the stack on Stacking Port 2 XGS 4528F or Off The Switch is not connected to other switches in the XGS stack on Stacking Port 2 4728F System Status Displays The Switch is starting up hourglas S icon Displays The LED is showing the Stack ID number of the Swi
254. e code identifying the frame and indicates that whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information SP TPID Service Provider Tag Protocol Identifier is the service provider VLAN stacking tag type Many vendors use 0x8100 or 0x9100 TPI D Tag Protocol Identifier is the customer IEEE 802 1Q tag f the VLAN stacking port role is Access Port then the Switch adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure If the VLAN stacking port role is Tunnel Port then the Switch only adds the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure that have an SP TPI D different to the one configured on the Switch If an incoming frame s SP TPID is the same as the one configured on the Switch then the Switch will not add the tag Priority refers to the IEEE 802 1p standard that allows the service provider to prioritize traffic based on the class of service CoS the customer has paid for On the Switch configure priority level of the inner IEEE 802 1Q tag in the Port Setup screen 0 is the lowest priority level and 7 is the highest VID is the VLAN ID SP VID is the VID for the second service provider s VLAN tag 23 3 1 Frame Format The frame format for an untagged Ethernet frame a single tagged 802 1Q frame customer and a double tagged 802 1Q frame service provider is shown next
255. e copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 155 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 29 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate RSTP on this port Edge Select this check box to configure a port as an edge port when it is directly attached to a computer An edge port changes its initial STP port state from blocking state to forwarding state immediately without going through listening and learning states right after the port is configured as an edge port or when its link status changes Note An edge port becomes a non edge port as soon as it receives a Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 26 on page 148 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses p
256. e memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 28 VLAN Mapping 28 3 Configuring VLAN Mapping Click the VLAN Mapping Configure link in the VLAN Mapping screen to display the screen as shown Use this screen to enable and edit the VLAN mapping rule s Figure 136 VLAN Mapping Configuration C VLAN Mapping Configure d VLAN Mapping Active S Name Port VID Translated VID Priority D Index Active Name Port VID Translated VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 VLAN Mapping Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this rule Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Port Type a port to be included in this rule VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 This is the VLAN tag carried in the packets and will be translated into the VID you specified in the Translated VI D field Translated VID Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 into which the customer VID carried in the packets will be translated Priority Select a priority level from 0 to 7 This is the priority level that replaces the customer priority level in the tagged packets or adds to the untagged packets Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table
257. e port isolation or private VLAN see Chapter 33 on page 315 for more information However it does not work across multiple switches For example broadcast traffic from isolated ports on a switch say B can be forwarded to all ports on other switches A and C including the isolated ports Isolated ports AN Root port 7 Designated port 8 SO C Ngee Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other After you enable RSTP MRSTP and smart isolation on the Switch the designated port s will be added to the isolated port list In the following example switch A is the root bridge Switch B s root port 7 connects to switch A and switch B s designated port 8 connects to switch C Traffic from isolated ports on switch B can only be sent through non isolated port 1 or root port 7 to switch A This prevents isolated ports on switch B sending traffic through designated port 8 to switch C Traffic received on designated port 8 from switch C will not be forwarded to any other isolated ports on switch B s Before Smart solation Isolated ports 2 6 Root port 7 Designated port 8 After Smart Isolation Isolated ports 2 6 8 Root port 7 Designated port 8 You should enable RSTP or MRSTP before you can use smart isolation on the Switch If the network topology changes the Switch automatically updates the isolated port list with the latest designated port informati
258. e screen as shown Note After you configure this screen make sure you also enable error detection for the specific control packets in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect screen Figure 149 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection CPU protection J Errdisable Reason ARP Port Rate Limit pkt s ojojoj ojo oli oli co 10 2 9 LIB DON IO 4 D 0 2 R XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 104 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection LABEL DESCRIPTION Reason Select the type of control packet you want to configure here Port This field displays the port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments to each port if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Rate Limit pkt s Enter a number from 0 to 256 to specify how many control packets this port can receive or transmit per second O means no rate limit You can configure the action that the Switch takes when the limit is exceeded See Section 32 5 on page 311 for detailed information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save l
259. e server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 46 7 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 46 7 1 Requirements for Using SSH You must install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH 46 8 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and d
260. e to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 6 IP Setup Use the IP Setup screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add IP domains 8 6 1 IP Interfaces The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The sub
261. ecrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator The SSL protocol specifies that the SSL server the Switch must always authenticate itself to the SSL client the computer which requests the HTTPS connection with the Switch whereas the SSL client only should authenticate itself when the SSL server requires it to do so Authenticating client certificates is optional and if selected means the SSL client must send the Switch a certificate You must apply for a certificate for the browser from a Certificate Authority CA that is a trusted CA on the Switch Please refer to the following figure XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 224 HTTPS Implementation WS HTTPS HTTP Note If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks al
262. ect this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP Timeout packets in order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are co
263. ectly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 Static Route Table 108 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purposes only Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is the Address immediate neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays t
264. ects obstruct the airflow of the fans Use the following procedures to connect the Switch to a power source after you have installed it Note Check the power supply requirements in Chapter 56 on page 463 and make sure you are using an appropriate power source Keep the power supply switch and the Switch s power switch in the OFF position until you come to the procedure for turning on the power Use only power wires of the required diameter for connecting the Switch to a power supply 3 2 5 1 AC Power Connection Note This is only for the AC model of the Switch Connect the female end of the power cord to the power socket of your Switch Connect the other end of the cord to a power outlet 3 2 5 2 DC Power Connection Note This is only for the DC model of the Switch The Switch uses a single ETB series terminal block plug with four pins which allows you to connect up to two separate power supplies If one power supply fails the system can operate on the remaining power supply Use two wires to connect to a single terminal pair one wire for the positive terminal and one wire for the negative terminal Note The current rating of the power wires must be greater than 20 Amps The power supply to which the Switch connects must have a built in circuit breaker or switch to toggle the power Note When installing the power wire push it wire firmly into the terminal as deep as possible and make sure that no exposed bare wire can be
265. ed Application gt Broadcast Storm Control D Broadcast Storm Contro g Active O Port Broadcast pkt s Multicast pkt s DLF pkt s 1 M REEENUNNE RE a 2 op oP RN 3 M NEN A m NE NNI NUN a 5 M RE RE A 6 M NENNEN RN NNI ee m NET c NET MM SI ae MENDA meg E Exc c a a pa m ee ees Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 173 Chapter 15 Broadcast Storm Control 174 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable traffic storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable this feature Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Broadcast Select this option and specify how many broadcast packets the port pkt s receives per second Multicast pkt s Select this option and specify how many multicast packets the port receives per second DLF pkt s Select this option and specify how many destination lookup failure DLF packets the port receives per second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s
266. eduling WRR ccena temere rentem 216 ce COWIQUREO CORP T carece danda ads eb Rub ce A RU dep dias tu ca pP Rr a npe T 217 Chapter 23 VLAN E 219 en MLAN SIE ONEVIEW oerien nae Daisies icq bee Qiu diete Mida bsc Drddd MEE 219 25 1 1 VLAN SIEHE XO essa idee eR ad Qn Rare a POP MD ED d 219 29 VLAN Stacking Pot ROES uico cett victo een un Cod RU Eco Doa Fdo ua E otra dc Kad i an 220 20o VLAN Tag DID M M 221 E35 1 VANIER IAL asssssssiumaistun pase pr eei ona a pec Es pad Gast aqoa gap i rep brade 221 20 4 Comiguring VLAN SISeRIE iode neiii ae EE lada top VA dab pro ted e 222 PAM M lige ci a EPI P eem m 223 23 2 TOON UB LOI occnasqibatdkite i deikasit ad E ia eset atl E s dad lupra MOERS SE 224 Chapter 24 uii M O O 227 2A 1 NUIT IVI tae cece nk Ea a Eae EE a Aa 227 21 1 IP TR ST Addas srin R 227 zw EI oana eatiaaaens salenipan sae uicaacnemnatiaanni peudaceennceaxcaae endnotes 227 ce WAI esou e H 228 231 4 IGMP Snooping And VLANS assiriana d dua krass dun arcani nae 228 2A 2 Mulcds GAUS TT 228 Ceca MURGAS nr MUST TU LUI TIE 229 Em Mtr ssjelr vb VLAN ER PET ETE TIEN 232 Mac Fee Prog seriis oin aneen a EEE EAEG 233 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents ELI eee osa Podio umn popa aao telson pbi ono a RO OU RA bb pb 235 AC Tt MYR POO e Dem 235 2402 MYR MOORS e 236
267. egin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Troubleshooting This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter The potential problems are divided into the following categories Power Hardware Connections and LEDs Switch Access and Login Switch Configuration 55 1 Power Hardware Connections and LEDs The Switch does not turn on None of the LEDs turn on 1 Make sure the Switch is turned on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the Switch Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the Switch and plugged in to an appropriate power source Make sure the power source is turned on Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor The ALM LED is on XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 457 Chapter 55 Troubleshooting Turn the Switch off and on in DC models or if the DC power supply is connected in AC DC models Disconnect and re connect the power adaptor or cord to the Switch in AC models or if the AC power supply is connected in AC DC models If the problem continues contact the vendor
268. el to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of this entry Collector This field displays IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port This field displays port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide PPPoE This chapter describes how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPoE client 31 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Overview 31 1 1 A PPPoE Intermediate Agent PPPoE IA is deployed between a PPPoE server and PPPoE clients It helps the PPPoE server identify and authenticate clients by adding subscriber line specific information to PPPoE discovery packets from clients on a per port or per port per VLAN basis before forwarding them to the PPPoE server i PPPoE Server PPPoE Client PPPoE IA oE Serve PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format If the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initialization and PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request packets from PPPoE clients This tag is defined in RFC 2516 and has the following format for t
269. el to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 8 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user on the same network VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain Note VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 9 on page 117 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 4 1 Smart Isolation To block traffic between two specific ports within the Switch you can us
270. elected below Mode Select the action that the Switch takes when the number of control packets exceed the rate limit on a port set in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt CPU protection screen inactive port The Switch disables the port on which the control packets are received inactive reason The Switch bypasses the processing of the specified control packets such as ARP or IGMP packets or drops all the specified control packets such as BPDU on the port rate limitation The Switch drops the additional control packets the port has to handle in every one second Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 312 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable 32 6 Error Disable Recovery Configuration Use this screen to to configure the Switch to automatically undo an action after the error is gone Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Recovery in the Advanced Application Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 151 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Recovery Active Reason loopguard ARP BPDU IGMP OEE O Timer Status
271. ent to either port 6 or 7 The computer should be able to get an IP address from the DHCP server If you put the DHCP server on port 6 or 7 the computer will not able to get an IP address 10 To check if DHCP snooping works go to Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard you should see an IP assignment with the type dhcp snooping as shown OE Guard J Static Binding DHCP Snooping ARP Inspection You can also telnet or log into the Switch s console Use the command show dhcp snooping binding to see the DHCP snooping binding table as shown next sysname show dhcp snooping binding MacAddress IpAddress Lease Type VLAN Port 00 02 00 00 00 1c 10 10 1 16 6d23h59m20s dhcp snooping 100 7 Total number of bindings 1 6 2 How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch This tutorial describes how to configure your Switch to forward DHCP client requests to a specific DHCP server The DHCP server can then assign a specific IP address based on the information in the DHCP requests 6 2 1 DHCP Relay Tutorial Introduction In this example you have configured your DHCP server 192 168 2 3 and want to have it assign a specific IP address say 172 16 1 18 and gateway information to XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials DHCP client A based on the system name VLAN ID and port number in the DHCP request Client A connects to the Switch s port 2 in VLAN 102 Figure 28 Tutorial DHCP Relay Scenario ms
272. er s Guide Forum Quick start guide CLI Reference Guide Support note Certification Declaration SNMP MIB File XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 3 About This User s Guide Download Library Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide Quick Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product Knowledge Base If you have a specific question about your product the answer may be here This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products Forum This contains discussions on ZyXEL products Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well Customer Support Should problems arise that cannot be solved by the methods listed above you should contact your vendor If you cannot contact your vendor then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device See http www zyxel com web contact us php for contact information Please have the following information ready when you contact an office Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warning
273. er speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group The Switch supports both static and dynamic link aggregation Note In a properly planned network it is recommended to implement static link aggregation only This ensures increased network stability and control over the trunk groups on your Switch See Section 17 6 on page 184 for a static port trunking example 17 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The Switch supports the link aggregation I EEE802 3ad standard This standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP which is a protocol that dynamically creates and manages trunk groups XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 177 Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 2 1 When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point to the same Ethernet switch and confi
274. er switch A or B Incoming layer 2 protocol packets received on an access port are encapsulated and forwarded to the tunnel ports The Tunnel port is an egress port at the edge of the service provider s network and connected to another service provider s switch Incoming encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port are decapsulated and sent to an access port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 29 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling 29 2 Configuring Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Click Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 139 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Layer 2 Protocol Tunne Active Destination MAC Address 00 no 00 DO no DO Point to Point LACP ri uU e Aa o zz Uv v pa v v Mode v gt e v c e E c Access Access Y Access oO ODN OD n 4 Ww HN Access Access aHa HaHa HaHaHa Ha inning aHa gupa da HaHa HE Hm t m Em a Access f Eaa Sa i E wear al Apply Cancel i ninininininininininininm minimininminimnmninimnnin niagiminminimimninininn n HaHaHa HaHaHa HaHaHa HaHaHa T Slll Elle O oOlotorrtororo E ETE ETETE n oelololeololo 4 4atiatiatiatiatia 4 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 92 Advanced Application gt Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
275. er to the Switch using the Restore Configuration screen Figure 214 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration g Maintenance To restore the device s configuration form a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to display the Choose File screen from which you can locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance 45 7 Backup a Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snapshots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 215 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen
276. erformance data about an individual port on the Switch Figure 31 Status Port Details OD Port Details Port info Port NO Name Link Status LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBs s Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packet Unicast Multicast Broadcast Pause Tagged RX Packet Unicast Multicast Broadcast Pause Control TX Collision Single Multiple Excessive Late Error Packet RX CRC Length Runt Distribution 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 512 to 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant Port Status 1 100M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 752 710 3 44 31 6 779 0 01 50 751 0 1 0 0 41 Oo o o 0 o o 2 wo amp 153 150 121 182 283 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table9 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Port NO This field displays the port number you are viewing Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbpsl 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for half duplex It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 9 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 1
277. ering Manager Active Vv Name Master VID 1 Apply Cancel Clustering Candidate 00 13 49 00 00 01 ES 2108 G ES 2108 G 00 13 49 00 00 02 GS 3012 GS 3012 List Password Add Cancel Refresh index MacAddr Name Model Remove 1 00 13 49 ae fb 7a ES 2024PWR ES 2024PWR DH The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 165 Management gt Clustering Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon amp appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN
278. ers connect area 1 and 2 to the backbone Figure 159 OSPF Network Example How OSPF Works Layer 3 devices exchange routing information to build a synchronized link state database within the same AS or area The link state database contains records of router IDs their associated links and path costs Each device can then use the link state database and Dijkstra algorithm to compute the least cost paths to network destinations Layer 3 devices build a synchronized link state database by exchanging Hello messages to confirm which neighbor layer 3 devices exist and then they exchange database descriptions DDs to create the link state database The link state database is constantly updated through LSAs Link State Advertisements Interfaces and Virtual Links An OSPF interface is a link between a layer 3 device and an OSPF network An interface has state information an IP address and subnet mask associated with it XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF When you configure an OSPF interface you first set an interface to transmit OSPF traffic and add the interface to an area You can configure a virtual link to establish maintain connectivity between a non backbone area and the backbone The virtual link must be configured on both layer 3 devices in the non backbone area and the backbone 37 1 4 OSPF and Router Elections The OSPF protocol provides for automatic election of Designated Router DR and Backup De
279. ery on the Switch How to Set Up a Guest VLAN How to Do Port Isolation in a VLAN How to Configure Routing Policy 6 1 How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch You only want DHCP server A connected to port 5 to assign IP addresses to all devices in VLAN network V Create a VLAN containing ports 5 6 and 7 Connect a computer M to the Switch s MGMT port Figure 27 Tutorial DHCP Snooping Tutorial Overview Note For related information about DHCP snooping see Section 26 1 on page 259 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials The settings in this tutorial are as the following Table 6 Settings in this Tutorial PORT DHCP SNOOPING HOST CONNECTED VLAN PVID PORT TRUSTED DHCP Server A 5 1 and 100 100 Yes DHCP Client B 6 Tand100 100 No DHCP Client C 7 Tand100 100 No 1 Access the Switch from the MGMT port through http 192 168 0 1 by default Log into the Switch by entering the username default admin and password default 1234 2 Goto Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN and create a VLAN with ID of 100 Add ports 5 6 and 7 in the VLAN by selecting Fixed in the Control field as shown Deselect Tx Tagging because you don t want outgoing traffic to contain this VLAN tag Click Add Static VLAN ND VLAN Status ACTIVE Iv Name NLAN 100 VLAN Group ID 100 Port Control Tagging Normal M Tx Tagging 1 Normal C Fixed
280. es an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 217 SNMP Management Model Manager Im Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed Switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed Switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a Switch Examples of variables include number of packets received node port status and so on A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 145 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object
281. ess ports at the edge of the service provider s network The Switch decapsulates the encapsulated layer 2 protocol packets received on a tunnel port by changing the destination MAC address to the original one and then forward them to an access port If the service s is not enabled on an access port the protocol packets are dropped Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide sFlow This chapter shows you how to configure sFlow to have the Switch monitor traffic in a network and send information to an sFlow collector for analysis 30 1 sFlow Overview sFlow RFC 3176 is a standard technology for monitoring switched networks An sFlow agent embedded on a switch or router gets sample data and packet statistics from traffic forwarded through its ports The sFlow agent then creates sFlow data and sends it to an sFlow collector The sFlow collector is a server that collects and analyzes sFlow datagram An sFlow datagram includes packet header input and output interface sampling process parameters and forwarding information sFlow minimizes impact on CPU load of the Switch as it analyzes sample dat
282. et to the destination Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Active This field displays whether the policy route profile is enabled or not Profile Name This field displays the name of the policy route profile with which the rule is associated Seq This field displays the rule index number that you configure in the Sequence field Click an index number to change the rule s Statement State This field displays permit when the rule action is activated and deny when is it deactivated Classifier This field displays the name of the classifier to which this policy applies Rule Delete Select the policy routing rule s that you want to remove Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Rule Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide RIP This chapter shows you how to configure RIP Routing Information Protocol 36 1 RIP Overview RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a routing device to ex
283. ets Example The following figure depicts an example in which two switches share the network traffic Hosts in the two network groups use different default gateways Each switch is configured to backup a virtual router using VRRP You wish to configure switch A as the master router for virtual router VR1 and as a backup for virtual router VR2 On the other hand switch B is the master for VR2 and a backup for VR1 Figure 203 VRRP Configuration Example Two Virtual Router Network 192 168 1 1 172 21 1 1 VRID 7 1 192 168 1 20 Li Iud 4 VR1 Fr e VRID 2 192 168 1 10 Default Gateway 192 168 1 21 E 172 21 1 10 B You need to configure the VRRP Configuration screen for virtual router VR2 on each switch while keeping the VRRP configuration in example 1 for virtual router XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 379 Chapter 42 VRRP VR1 refer to Section 42 4 2 on page 379 Configure the VRRP parameters on the switches as shown in the figures below Figure 204 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch A Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP Active iv Name Example2 Network 192 168 1 1 24 Virtual Router ID 2 v Advertisement Interval h Preempt Mode iv Priority foo 172 21 1 100 192 168 1 21 0 0 0 0 EXAMPLE Figure 205 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Parameter Settings for VR2 on Switch B Active Name Network Virtual Router ID Adverti
284. etween 0 and 63 TOS Specify the type of service TOS priority level Metering You can configure the desired bandwidth available to a traffic flow Traffic that exceeds the maximum bandwidth allocated in cases where the network is congested is called out of profile traffic Bandwidth Specify the bandwidth in kilobit per second Kbps Enter a number between 1 and 1000000 Out of Specify a new DSCP number between 0 and 63 if you want to replace or Ee remark the DSCP number for out of profile traffic Action Specify the action s the Switch takes on the associated classified traffic flow Forwarding Select No change to forward the packets Select Discard the packet to drop the packets Select Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping to retain the frames that were marked to be dropped before Priority Select No change to keep the priority setting of the frames Select Set the packet s 802 1p priority to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the Priority field Select Send the packet to priority queue to put the packets in the designated queue Select Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value to replace the packet s 802 1p priority field with the value you set in the TOS field Diffserv Select No change to keep the TOS and or DSCP fields in the packets Select Set the packet s TOS field to set the TOS field with the value you configure
285. eue s minimum bandwidth based on their bandwidth weight the number you configure in the Weight field Queues with larger weights get more guaranteed bandwidth than queues with smaller weights Weighted Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Weight Q0 Q7 When you select WFQ or WRR enter the queue weight here Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Hybrid SPQ Lowest Queue This field is applicable only when you select WFQ or WRR Select a queue QO to Q7 to have the Switch use SPQ to service the subsequent queue s after and including the specified queue for the 1000Base T 1000Base X and 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports For example if you select Q5 the Switch services traffic on Q5 Q6 and Q7 using SPQ Select None to always use WFQ or WRR Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide VLAN Stacking This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN stacking on
286. fg See Table 142 on page 394 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 45 8 3 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 143 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Specify the default local directory path Directory 45 8 4 FTP Restrictions FTP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Service Access Control screen The IP address es in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disconnect the FTP session immediately XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch
287. ficate presented bson Sc BE It if possible though unike iat someone may be ercept your commumMeat har v7 PETNE If you suspect the certificate shown does not belong to 192 168 1 1 please cancel the connection and notify the site administrator View Certificate Cancel Help XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control 46 9 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection Figure 228 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection B web Configurator Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help e 2 OQ 3480me9dg u 3d Address hitps i92 168 0 yrpsyshtm RG G ID Save Status A Logout H Help Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s Up Time T Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Ki Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 amp Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 12 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 1
288. figuring Subnet Based VLAN Click Subnet Based VLAN in the VLAN Port Setting screen to display the configuration screen as shown Note Subnet based VLAN applies to un tagged packets and is applicable only when you use IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Figure 44 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based Subnet Based VLAN J Vlan Port Setting Active D DHCP Vlan Override r Apply Active r Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Add Cancel Index Active Name IP Mask Bits VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Check this box to activate this subnet based VLANs on the Switch DHCP Vlan When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP clients can renew their IP address Override through the DHCP VLAN or via another DHCP server on the subnet based VLAN Select this checkbox to force the DHCP clients in this IP subnet to obtain their IP addresses through the DHCP VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Active Check this box to activate the IP subnet VLAN you are creating or editing Name Enter up to 32 alpha
289. figuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 41 4 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 188 Global DHCP Relay Network Example b DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 VLAN2 Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 189 DHCP Relay Configuration Example DHCP Relay Status Active Iv Remote DHCP Server 1 192 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information Iv Option 82 Information L1 Apply Cancel EXAMPLE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 41 5 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays Note You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on th
290. following table describes the labels in this screen Table 80 DHCP Snooping Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch You still have to enable DHCP snooping on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Note The Switch will drop all DHCP requests if you enable DHCP snooping and there are no trusted ports DHCP Vlan Select a VLAN ID if you want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to DHCP servers on a specific VLAN Note You have to enable DHCP snooping on the DHCP VLAN too You can enable Option82 in the DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure screen Section 26 5 2 on page 272 to help the DHCP servers distinguish between DHCP requests from different VLAN Select Disable if you do not want the Switch to forward DHCP packets to a specific VLAN Database If Timeout interval is greater than Write delay interval it is possible that the next update is scheduled to occur before the current update has finished successfully or timed out In this case the Switch waits to start the next update until it completes the current one Agent URL Enter the location of the DHCP snooping database The location should be expressed like this tftp domain name or I P address directory if applicable file name for example tftp 192 168 10 1 database txt Timeout interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snoopin
291. frames See Chapter 41 on page 361 for more information about DHCP relay option 82 When the DHCP server responds the Switch removes the information in the Agent Information field before forwarding the response to the original source You can configure this setting for each source VLAN This setting is independent of the DHCP relay settings Chapter 41 on page 361 26 1 1 4 Configuring DHCP Snooping Follow these steps to configure DHCP snooping on the Switch 1 Enable DHCP snooping on the Switch 2 Enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and configure DHCP relay option 82 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 3 26 1 2 26 1 2 1 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of DHCP packets that each port can receive per second Configure static bindings ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 116 Example Man in the middle Attack In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things t pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B t pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communica
292. from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 5 on page 150 for more information on MSTP Figure 67 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP OMS Port Status Bridge Active Hello Time 2 seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay 15 seconds Maximum hops 20 Configuration Name 0019cb6f9159 Revision Number 0 Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s Port Active Priority Path Cost 1 a 128 E 2 E 128 4 3 F 128 4 4 Li 128 4 5 128 ee a 1 a Le d d 27 o 128 2 28 o 128 2 Ada Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 33 Advanced Application Spanning Tree P
293. g 2 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 3 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 4 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden Iv TxTagging 5 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 6 Normal C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Normal C Fixed C Forhidden iv TxTaggin o CU eae eye WU vu XU Add Cancel Clear Name Delete 1 z g Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed VLAN Group Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and ID 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide LE Chapter 9 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This
294. g C Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging Tx ing XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 8 Click the VLAN Status link in the Static VLAN screen and then the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen D VLAN Statu S eng VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 3 Index VID 3 1 2 102 a 123 VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN Elapsed Time Status 5 19 47 Static 5 19 47 Static 0 05 28 Static 9 Enter 123 in the PVID field for ports 2 3 4 and 5 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory OREN Port Setting g GVRP Port Ingress Check PVID Oo 1 O 1 2 o 3 3 1 O 5 E 123 6 O 1 7 1 1 8 O 1 ees Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vian VLAN Status GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation o All v oO a E All Y o o FI l O o E F o o o o All Lr oO All oO o ri All 7 m i o All Y o o 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 6 2 Creating a Private VLAN Rule Follow the steps below to configure private VLAN for VLAN 123 Click Advanced Application gt Private VLAN In the Priv
295. g gt MVR Group Configuration Group Configuration NN VR Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from VLAN ID the drop down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted Address decimal notation Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 227 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 24 1 1 on page 227 for more information on IP multicast addresses XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Table 67 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use th
296. g database before it gives up Write delay interval Enter how long 10 65535 seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database the first time the current bindings change after an update Once the next update is scheduled additional changes in current bindings are automatically included in the next update Renew DHCP Snooping URL Enter the location of a DHCP snooping database and click Renew if you want the Switch to load it You can use this to load dynamic bindings from a different DHCP snooping database than the one specified in Agent URL When the Switch loads dynamic bindings from a DHCP snooping database it does not discard the current dynamic bindings first If there is a conflict the Switch keeps the dynamic binding in volatile memory and updates the Binding collisions counter in the DHCP Snooping screen Section 26 4 on page 266 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 5 1 DHCP Snooping Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for DHCP snooping Note The Swit
297. g with the MAC address of a client for authentication with the RADIUS server You can enter up to 32 printable ASCII characters XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 46 Advanced Application Port Authentication MAC Authentication LABEL DESCRIPTION Timeout Specify the amount of time before the Switch allows a client MAC address that fails authentication to try and authenticate again Maximum time is 3000 seconds When a client fails MAC authentication its MAC address is learned by the MAC address table with a status of denied The timeout period you specify here is the time the MAC address entry stays in the MAC address table until it is cleared If you specify 0 for the timeout value then this entry will not be deleted from the MAC address table Note If the Aging Time in the Switch Setup screen is set to a lower value then it supersedes this setting See Section 8 5 on page 108 Port This field displays a port number Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit MAC authentication on this port You must first allow MAC authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run ti
298. gure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switch to avoid causing network topology loops Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 39 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 40 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PORT PORT PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PRIORITY NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port 178 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 3 Link Aggregation Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Status screen displays by default See Section 17 1 on page 177 for more information Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status g Link Aggregation Setting Group Enabled Synchronized E m N ID Ports Ports Aggregator ID Criteria Status T1 4 src dst mac Static 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 id 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000j 9 d9tmac LACP T3 src dst mac
299. h The Switch evaluates and marks the packets based on the TRTCM settings Note You must also activate DiffServ on the Switch and the individual ports for the Switch to drop red high loss priority colored packets Mode Select color blind to have the Switch treat all incoming packets as uncolored All incoming packets are evaluated against the CIR and PIR Select color aware to treat the packets as marked by some preceding entity Incoming packets are evaluated based on their existing color Incoming packets that are not marked proceed through the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch r Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this to activate TRTCM on the port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Differentiated Services Table 127 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Commit Rate Specify the Commit Information Rate CIR for this port Peak Rate Specify the Peak Information Rate PIR for this port DSCP Use this section to specify the DSCP values that you want to assign to packets based on the color they
300. h ORE POSSE EROS Man oot Rp E US 85 BB ITO E VCAN e eR 86 B n 2 CRS AIC a Povie VLSN RUIE aise masanna tad n dp ced laa dite 89 ea How ta Comoe Routing Pelicy eed bo od ether oni beth dd be pet dddid obi ud dui be t DU e ES ard dero TAA 90 0 7 1 Create a layers GRESSET Loo pen a ub Hg an bd ub on Maps 90 6 7 2 Greate a Poly Routing UNS iiio do o ttu Fore EY Gua earn anneal oui d aA 91 Part IF Technical Referente iiie eeeeeesesnn eror sn ana nn ans Sape nh Ras EEku REESE nni 93 Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics reenn namaia anan S MAR s PR AES GS anaa 95 Bh Re OU ULT 95 Terona SNA iaaa TT 95 TETONA PEEING suanpan ninnaa ITIN 97 Chapter 8 Basie SETU e 101 AEE E o 101 eic ic Nor is ei anana ON 102 AERE EEE I cm cmd 104 RUM pugecisgspEC YLANG E HP 106 Ec WOME LN WR ss catia doct don bea a bertun b Oedacb A I aufi pero Da dev E 107 E SWIG UU Er e ie M 108 SB IP SBUD arnai dict ddr RPM bana des pidge eer 110 og NP Vie PAGS ee Ut ero T UNT 110 Bek PON SUR e M 113 Chapter 9 Djs m Em 117 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLANS uisi eren naain Fe quick aac 117 9 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames auci ces 117 92 AuDmelie VLAN Regisirellgl iuxsestarchasstianacapt date ka qunaas Gaodacaaoqanatcat ada crac ad 118 ZN EPI m Cm TL 118 EAE a a 118 Oo Pon Ecrit CET DET 119
301. h may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of the bridge priority plus the MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits second a configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without second receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding See Section 13 1 3 on page 149 for information on port states Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 157 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MRSTP click MRSTP in the Advanced Applicatio
302. half It also shows the cable type Copper or Fiber for the combo ports This field displays Down if the port is not connected to any device State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port See Section 13 1 3 on page 149 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data sent on this port in kilobytes per second Rx KB s This field shows the transmission speed of data received on this port in kilobytes per second Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Type a port number select Port and then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for that port or select Any to clear statistics for all ports XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics 7 2 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed p
303. hange routing information with other routers OSPF OSPF Open Shortest Path First is a link state protocol designed to distribute routing information within an autonomous system AS An autonomous system is a collection of networks using a common routing protocol to exchange routing information OSPF is best suited for large networks DVMRP DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP defined in RFC 2338 allows you to create redundant backup gateways to ensure that the default gateway of a host is always available STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol M R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other M R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the g
304. he CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 60 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link 152 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 61 Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 Max Age second 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 Cost to Bridge Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times Time Since Last Change Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 0 D 0 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP MRSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that follows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 13 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP
305. he Switch Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Role Select Normal to have the Switch ignore frames received or transmitted on this port with VLAN stacking tags Anything you configure in SPVID and Priority of the Port based QinQ or the Selective QinQ screen are ignored Select Access Port to have the Switch add the SP TPID tag to all incoming frames received on this port Select Access Port for ingress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network Select Tunnel Port to have the Switch add the Tunnel TPID tag to all outgoing frames sent on this port In order to support VLAN stacking on a port the port must be able to allow frames of 1526 Bytes 1522 Bytes 4 Bytes for the second tag to pass through it Tunnel TPID is a standard Ethernet type code identifying the frame and indicates TPID whether the frame carries IEEE 802 1Q tag information Enter a four digit hexadecimal number from 0000 to FFFF that the Switch adds in the outer VLAN tag of the frames sent on the tunnel p
306. he cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 Static Route 322 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 35 1 35 1 1 m m Policy Routing This chapter shows you how to configure policy routing rules Policy Route Overview Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the Switch takes the shortest path to forward a packet Policy routing provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets prior to the normal routing Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall policy routing process A routing policy defines the action to take when a packet meets the criteria in a specified classifier The action is taken only when all the criteria are met Benefits Source Based Routing Network administrators can use policy based routing to direct traffic from different users through different connections Cost Savings Policy routing allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high bandwidth high cost paths while using low cost paths for batch traffic Load Sharing Network administrators can use policy routing to distribute traffic among multiple paths
307. he new IP address f you changed the IP address and have forgotten it see the troubleshooting suggestions for forgot the IP address for the Switch 2 Check the hardware connections and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected See Section 3 3 on page 45 3 Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop up windows and has JavaScripts and Java enabled 4 Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch If you know that there are routers between your computer and the Switch skip this step 5 Reset the device to its factory defaults and try to access the Switch with the default IP address See Section 4 6 on page 54 6 If the problem continues contact the vendor or try one of the advanced suggestions Advanced Suggestions Try to access the Switch using another service such as Telnet If you can access the Switch check the remote management settings to find out why the Switch does not respond to HTTP can see the Login screen but cannot log in to the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 1 Make sure you have entered the user name and password correctly The default user name is admin and the default password is 1234 These fields are case sensitive so make sure Caps Lock is not on 2 You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Check that you have enabled l
308. hen you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to c ontinue in Netscape XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 417 Chapter 46 Access Control Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 226 Security Certificate 1 Netscape Website Certified by an Unknown Authority A ara i Possible reasons for this e Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete dueJ iscanti jon You are connected to a site pretendina MR HESS bly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this willing to to accept this certificate for the purpose of id 00a0c5012345 xamine Certificate Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site coe __ Figure 227 Security Certificate 2 Netscape Security Error Domain Name Mismatch SE onnection with 19 y Arti
309. hernet type This field shows which Ethernet protocol is part of this protocol based VLAN VID This field shows the VLAN ID of the port Priority This field shows the priority which is assigned to frames belonging to this protocol based VLAN Delete Click this to delete the protocol based VLANs which you marked for deletion Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 10 Create an IP based VLAN Example This example shows you how to create an IP VLAN which includes ports 1 4 and 8 Follow these steps using the screen below 1 Activate this protocol based VLAN 2 Typethe port number you want to include in this protocol based VLAN Type 1 3 Give this protocol based VLAN a descriptive name Type I P VLAN 4 Select the protocol Leave the default value I P 5 Type the VLAN ID of an existing VLAN In our example we already created a static VLAN with an ID of 5 Type 5 6 Leave the priority set to O and click Add Figure 47 Protocol Based VLAN Configuration Example 99 Based VLAN Active v Port 1 Name IP VLAN IP Ethernet type C Others Hex VID 5 Priority 0 x Add Cancel Index Active Port Name Ethernet type VID Priority Delete Delete Cancel To add more ports to this protocol based VLAN 1 Click the index number of the protocol based VLAN entry Click 1 2 Change the value in the Por
310. hing to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution f the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste Used electrical Your product is marked with this symbol which is known as the WEEE mark WEEE and electronic equipment should be treated separately XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Safety Warnings XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview Hoere e ES ER Lt E 25 Sab Co Ee TOON SURE oae emp ar ate dente eR votati obo MA Hp d 27 Hardware installation and Conil 2uiassadsreszcnniiu prier ber tam nO cad tnis Poe qb da dc odan AE 33 n VENI WE E 37 The Vra OBI DE ossia rca e ERE dar Dad a b a Ebrei e D ae Kara 47 Ilias Seu TE TANS cuisse bA o Her ORE Peek dadbte GR UE RR tei addet bond ape HV edet o bed tas
311. his feature Table 95 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Vendor specific Tag Format The Tag Type is 0x0105 for vendor specific tags as defined in RFC 2516 The Tag Len indicates the length of Value i1 and i2 The Value is the 32 bit number 0x00000DE9 which stands for the ADSL Forum IANA entry i1 and i2 are PPPoE intermediate agent sub options which contain additional information about the PPPOE client XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE 31 1 2 Sub Option Format There are two types of sub option Agent Circuit ID Sub option and Agent Remote ID Sub option They have the following formats Table 96 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format User defined String SubOpt Length Value Table 97 PPPoE IA Remote ID Sub option Format SubOpt Length Value The 1 in the first field identifies this as an Agent Circuit ID sub option and 2 identifies this as an Agent Remote ID sub option The next field specifies the length of the field The Switch takes the Circuit ID string you manually configure for a VLAN on a port as the highest priority and the Circuit ID string for a port as the second priority In addition the Switch puts the PPPoE client s MAC address into the Agent Remote ID Sub option if you do not specify any user defined string 31 1 2 1 Flexible Circuit ID Syntax with Identifier String and Variables If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a VLAN on a specific port or for a specific port the Swi
312. hod The choices are Same as Area None default Simple and MD5 To exchange OSPF packets with a peer border router you must make the authentication method and or password settings the same as the peer border router Select Same as Area to use the same authentication method within the area and set the related fields when necessary Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using a simple password Select MD5 to authenticate OSPF packets transmitted through this interface using MD5 authentication Key ID When you select MD5 in the Authentication field specify the identification number of the authentication you want to use Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password eight character long When you select MD5 in the Authentication field enter a password 16 character long Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays an index number of an entry Name This field displays a descriptive name of a virtual link
313. iagnostic or routing purposes ICQ UDP 4000 This is a popular Internet chat program IGMP User Defined 2 Internet Group Multicast Protocol is MULTI CAST used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts IKE UDP 500 The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management IRC TCP UDP 6667 This is another popular Internet chat program MSN Messenger TCP 1863 Microsoft Networks messenger service uses this protocol NEW ICQ TCP 5190 An Internet chat program NEWS TCP 144 A protocol for news groups NFS UDP 2049 Network File System NFS is a client server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments NNTP TCP 119 Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the USENET newsgroup service PING User Defined 1 Packet I Nternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Appendix A Common Services Table 175 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION POP3 TCP 110 Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e mail from a POP3 server through a temporary connection TCP IP or other PPTP TCP 1723 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the control cha
314. icast television example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case an uplink port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 103 MVR Multicast Television Example VLAN 1 Multicast VLAN S B L gt I Ss SE A t m d 4 cus ain z u u u mu mm om AJ x XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create mu
315. icate packets being filtered when loops exist in the network topology DVMRP prunes trim the multicast delivery tree s DVMRP grafts attach a branch back onto the multicast delivery tree 39 3 Configuring DVMRP Configure DVMRP on the Switch when you wish it to act as a multicast router mrouter Click IP Application gt DVMRP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 174 IP Application gt DVMRP I Mu M ND Active Oo Threshold 255 Index Network VID Active 1 10 10 10 1 24 2 O 2 192 158 1 1 24 1 D Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 DVMRP The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 124 IP Application gt DVMRP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on the Switch You should do this if you want the Switch to act as a multicast router Threshol d Threshold is the maximum time to live TTL value TTL is used to limit the scope of multicasting You should reduce this value if you do not wish to flood Layer 3 devices many hops away with multicast traffic This applies only to multicast traffic this Switch sends out Index Index is the DVMRP configuration for the IP routing domain defined under Network The maximum number of DVMRP configurations allowed is the maximum number of IP routing domains allowed on the Switch See Section 8 6 on page 110 for more information on IP routing d
316. ication Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Enter the port where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add Click Add to save your rule to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this rule if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to reset the fields to the factory defaults Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address rule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLA
317. ide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select the first Active checkbox to enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch Select the Active checkboxes for ports 1 to 8 to turn on 802 1x authentication on the selected ports Click Apply c OKA Port Authentication Guest Vlan Active v Port A bso Max Req Reauth Reauth period Quiet period Tx diam Supp Timeout secs secs secs secs On 1 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 2 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 3 v 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 4 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 5 I 2 On Y 3600 60 30 30 6 2 On 3600 60 30 30 7 v 2 On 3600 60 30 30 8 vi 2 On v 3600 60 30 30 9 Fl 2 On 3600 60 30 30 G 4 HEI J eS a nv 0 6 5 3 Enabling Guest VLAN 1 Click the Guest Vlan link in the 802 1x screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 2 Select Active and enter the guest VLAN ID 200 in this example on ports 1 2 and 3 The Switch puts unauthenticated clients in the specified guest VLAN Set Host mode to Multi Secure to have the Switch authenticate each client that connects to one of these ports and specify the maximum number of clients that the Switch will authenticate on each of these port 5 in this example Click Apply Xdgctiucn 802 1x Port Active Guest Vian Host mode Multi Secure Num F Multi Host 1 Multi Secure 5 2 Multi Secure 5 3 Multi Secure 5 4 o 1 Multi Host 1 5 C
318. iewing the IP Table Click Management gt IP Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 242 Management gt IP Table Sort by 1 2 3 OLE CD Index P VID Port IP Address VID Port Type 192 168 1 5 1 6 dynamic 192 168 1 10 0 CPU static 192 158 1 255 0 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 167 Management gt IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below IP Click this button to display and arrange the data according to IP address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number Index This field displays the index number IP Address This is the IP address of the device from which the incoming packets came 448 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 51 IP Table Table 167 Management IP Table continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VID This is the VLAN group to which the packet belongs Port This is the port from which the above IP address was learned This field displays CPU to indicate the IP address belongs to the Switch Type This shows whether the IP address is dynamic lea
319. ifier Follow the steps below to configure a classifier that sorts traffic with DSCP value 58 into a data flow 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Goto Advanced Application gt Classifier and select Active Enter a descriptive name DSCP58 in this example Select the second option of DSCP and enter 58 in the field provided XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory ED Classer g v DSCP58 i Packet Format All v Any VLAN gt O 9 Any Priorit OIS G All v Ethernet Type MN Others Hex Laye T 9 Any MAC Address a MAC Source Any Port ei O Any Destination MAC Address a4 MAC IP Prot All__ C Establish only IP Protocol Others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 I aver 3 Address Prefix iiid Source xm Any Socket Number O IP Address 0 0 0 0 Address Prefix r Destination ave IO Any Socket Number A Ges 6 7 2 Create a Policy Routing Rule Follow the steps below to set up a policy routing profile first and then a rule to forward traffic of classifier DSCP58 to gateway R2 1 Click IP Application Policy Routing 2 Select Active and enter a descriptive name for this profile To R2 for example Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Click th
320. ify the source VLAN ID in the field provided Priority Select Any to classify traffic from any priority level or select the second option and specify a priority level in the field provided Ethernet Select an Ethernet type or select Other and enter the Ethernet type number in Type hexadecimal value Refer to Table 51 on page 205 for information Source MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a source select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Port Type the port number to which the rule should be applied You may choose one port only or all ports Any Destination MAC Select Any to apply the rule to all MAC addresses Address To specify a destination select the second choice and type a MAC address in valid MAC address format six hexadecimal character pairs Layer 3 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 3 classifier DSCP Select Any to classify traffic from any DSCP or select the second option and specify a DSCP DiffServ Code Point number between 0 and 63 in the field provided IP Select an IP protocol type or select Other and enter the protocol number in Protocol decimal value Refer to Table 52 on page 205 for more information You may select Establish Only for TCP protocol type This means that the Switch will pick out the packets that are sent to establish TCP
321. ight setting is 5 the actual quantum guaranteed to the associated queue would be as follows 2 x 10KB 160 KB 22 1 3 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 22 Queuing Method 22 2 Configuring Queuing Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 93 Advanced Application Queuing Method Queuing Method HN Weight Hybrid SPQ
322. illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping DSCP 6 bits Unused 2 bits XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 207 Chapter 21 Policy Rule The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 21 2 Configuring Policy Rules You must first configure a classifier in the Classifier screen Refer to Section 20 2 on page 201 for more information XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule Click Advanced Applications Policy Rule in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 90 Advanced Application Policy Rule aic Active FI Name Classifier s General Metering Bandwidth Kbps Out of Profile Egress Port 1 Euri Parameters Priority Ov DSCP TOS ov Forwarding No change Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change Setthe packets 802 1p priority Send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No ch
323. ing Time o0 seconds Join Timer bo milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level jez levels s gt leveld 4 level3 3 gt level2 1 levelt joz level 2 Apply Cancel 3 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 4 Inthe Static VLAN screen select ACTIVE enter a descriptive name VLAN 123 for example in the Name field and enter 123 in the VLAN Group ID field 5 Select Fixed to configure ports 2 3 4 and 5 to be permanent members of this VLAN 6 Clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending frames out of these ports 7 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off CONTAINED ACTIVE Name VLAN Group ID O Normal ne w Nj Normal Normal Normal 9 Normal 6 7 8 9 Fixed Normal Fixed O Normal Fixed Port Control Normal 9 Normal Q Fixed Fixed O Fixed O Fixed O Fixed c Fixe VLAN 123 123 Mi Q Q Forbidden O Forbidden Forbidden O Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden Forbidden O Forbidden d Go VLAN Status Tagging v Tx Tagging v Tx Tagging C Tx Tagging C Tx Tagging C Tx Taggin
324. ing protocols such as RIP The following table summarizes some of the major differences between OSPF and RIP Table 113 OSPF vs RIP OSPF RIP Network Size Large Small with up to 15 routers Metrics Bandwidth hop count throughput Hop count round trip time and reliability Convergence Fast Slow 37 1 1 OSPF Autonomous Systems and Areas An OSPF autonomous system AS can be divided into logical areas Each area represents a group of adjacent networks All areas are connected to a backbone also known as area 0 The backbone is the transit area to route packets between two areas A stub area at the edge of an AS is not a transit area since there is only one connection to the stub area XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 331 Chapter 37 OSPF 37 1 2 37 1 3 The following table describes the four classes of OSPF routers Table 114 OSPF Router Types TYPE DESCRIPTION Internal Router IR An Internal or intra area router is a router in an area Area Border Router An Area Border Router connects two or more areas ABR Backbone Router BR A backbone router has an interface to the backbone AS Boundary Router An AS boundary router exchanges routing information with routers in other ASs The following figure depicts an OSPF network example The backbone is area 0 with a backbone router The internal routers are in area 1 and 2 The area border rout
325. ink LOOOBASE SX LX RFC 2516 A method for transmitting PPP over Ethernet PPPoE RFC 3176 sFlow RFC 3415 View based Access Control Model VACM for the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 471 Chapter 56 Product Specifications 472 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Common Services The following table lists some commonly used services and their associated protocols and port numbers For a comprehensive list of port numbers ICMP type code numbers and services visit the IANA Internet Assigned Number Authority web site Name This is a short descriptive name for the service You can use this one or create a different one if you like Protocol This is the type of IP protocol used by the service If this is TCP UDP then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP If this is User Defined the Port s is the IP protocol number not the port number Port s This value depends on the Protocol Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers f the Protocol is TCP UDP or TCP UDP this is the IP port number f the Protocol is USER this is the IP protocol number Description This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used Table 175 Commonly Used Services NAME PROTOCOL PORT S DESCRIPTION AH User Defined 51 The
326. ink on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 32 5 Error Disable Detect Configuration Use screen to have the Switch detect whether the control packets exceed the rate limit configured for a port and configure the action to take once the limit is exceeded Click the Click Here link next to Errdisable Detect link in the Advanced Application gt Errdisable screen to display the screen as shown Figure 150 Advanced Application gt Errdisable gt Errdisable Detect Errdisable Detect J Errdisable Cause Active Mode F inactive pot v ARP Li inactive port lj v BPDU oO inactive port Y IGMP F inactive port NE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 32 Error Disable The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 105 Advanced Application Errdisable Errdisable Detect LABEL DESCRIPTION Cause This field displays the types of control packet that may cause CPU overload Use this row to make the setting the same for all entries Use this row first and then make adjustments to each entry if necessary Note Changes in this row are copied to all the entries as soon as you make them Active Select this option to have the Switch detect if the configured rate limit for a specific control packet is exceeded and take the action s
327. inspection in a file on an external TFTP server If you set up the DHCP snooping database the Switch can reload the dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database after the Switch restarts XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard You can configure the name and location of the file on the external TFTP server The file has the following format Figure 115 DHCP Snooping Database File Format initial checksum TYPE DHCP SNOOPING VERSION 1 BEGIN binding 1 checksum 1 binding 2 lt checksum 1 2 gt lt binding n gt checksum 1 2 n END The lt initial checksum gt helps distinguish between the bindings in the latest update and the bindings from previous updates Each binding consists of 72 bytes a space and another checksum that is used to validate the binding when it is read If the calculated checksum is not equal to the checksum in the file that binding and all others after it are ignored 26 1 1 3 DHCP Relay Option 82 Information The Switch can add information to DHCP requests that it does not discard This provides the DHCP server more information about the source of the requests The Switch can add the following information Slot ID 1 byte port ID 1 byte and source VLAN ID 2 bytes System name up to 32 bytes This information is stored in an Agent Information field in the option 82 field of the DHCP headers of client DHCP request
328. is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in Port more detail without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Type the port number of the monitor port Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror by selecting from the drop down list box Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 17 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple low
329. ish customer A and tag 48 to distinguish customer B at edge device 1 and then stripping those tags at edge device 2 as the data frames leave the network Figure 94 VLAN Stacking Example A A VLAN 24 VLAN 24 Ns VLAN 24 B 23 2 VLAN Stacking Port Roles Each port can have three VLAN stacking roles Normal Access Port and Tunnel Port the latter is for Gigabit ports only Select Normal for regular non VLAN stacking IEEE 802 1Q frame switching Select Access Port for ingress ports on the service provider s edge devices 1 and 2 in the VLAN stacking example figure The incoming frame is treated as untagged so a second VLAN tag outer VLAN tag can be added Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be disabled on a port where you choose Normal or Access Port Select Tunnel Port available for Gigabit ports only for egress ports at the edge of the service provider s network All VLANs belonging to a customer can be aggregated into a single service provider s VLAN using the outer VLAN tag defined by the Service Provider s SP VLAN ID VID Note Static VLAN Tx Tagging MUST be enabled on a port where you choose Tunnel Port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking 23 3 VLAN Tag Format A VLAN tag service provider VLAN stacking or customer IEEE 802 1Q consists of the following three fields Table 56 VLAN Tag Format Type Priority VID Type is a standard Ethernet typ
330. it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this rule This is for identification purposes only MAC This field displays the source destination MAC address with the VLAN Address identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected checkbox es in the Delete column XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards EEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol EEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 13 14
331. its BPDUs 148 bridging 468 C CDP 294 certifications 477 notices 478 viewing 479 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 117 changing the password 53 Cisco Discovery Protocol see CDP CIST 152 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 150 Class of Service CoS 353 classifier 201 203 and QoS 201 editing 204 example 206 overview 201 setup 201 203 204 viewing 204 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 435 and switch passwords 441 cluster manager 435 440 cluster member 435 441 cluster member firmware upgrade 439 network example 436 setup 440 specification 435 status 436 switch models 435 VID 440 web configurator 437 cluster manager 435 cluster member 435 command interface 31 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 150 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 152 configuration 321 change running config 391 configuration file 55 backup 393 restore 55 392 saving 390 configuration saving 54 console port settings 44 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 477 CPU management port 132 CPU protection configuration 310 overview 309 current date 105 current time 105 D Database Description DD 332 daylight saving time 105 default gateway 368 Designated Router DR and OSPF 333 DHCP 361 client IP pool 368 configuration options 361 modes 361 relay agent 361 relay example 369 server 361 setup 367 DHCP Dynamic Host Configura
332. l HTTP connection attempts 46 9 HTTPS Example 46 9 1 If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch you wish to access Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configu Figure 225 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer rator access is blocked o A o amp 46 9 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages Security Alert Information you exchange with this site cannot be viewed or changed by others However there is a problem with the site s security certificate The security certificate was issued by a company you have not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site Do you want to proceed Yes No View Certificate x W
333. lays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table I P The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 6 1 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Use this screen to look at various statistics about ARP packets in each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt VLAN Status Figure 124 ARP Inspection VLAN Status Show VLAN range OF Inspection VLAN Status Status VID Received Request Reply Forwarded Dropped Enabled VLAN C
334. ld displays Yes when the policy routing profile is activated and No when it is deactivated Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name for this profile This is for identification purposes only Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 35 Policy Routing 35 2 1 Policy Routing Rule Configuration You must first configure a layer 3 classifier in the Classifier screen see Section 20 2 on page 201 and a policy routing profile in the Policy Routing screen see Section 35 2 on page 324 Use this screen to configure a policy route to override the default shortest path routing behavior and forward packets based on the classifier and action you specify A policy route rule defines the matching classifier and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria in the classifier The action is taken only when all the criteria are met Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis before normal routing The Switch does not perform normal routing on packets that match any of the policy routes Click Rule Configuration in the I P Application gt Policy Routing screen to display the screen as shown Figure 157 IP Application gt Policy Routing gt Rule Configuration LAC LSD Profile Configuration policyroute 1 Profile Name
335. le 192 168 1 254 Domain DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its Name Server corresponding IP address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in order to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Specify which traffic flow I n Band or Out of band the Switch is to send Management packets originating from itself such as SNMP traps or packets with unknown source Select Out of band to have the Switch send the packets to the management port labelled MGMT This means that device s connected to the other port s do not receive these packets Select I n Band to have the Switch send the packets to all ports except the management port labelled MGMT to which connected device s do not receive these packets Management IP Address Use these fields to set the settings for the out of band management port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EU Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Enter the out of band management IP address of your Switch in dotted Address decimal notation For example 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for Mask example 255 255 255 0 Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal Gateway notation for example 192 168 0 254 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the
336. le names 393 filtering 145 rules 145 filtering database MAC table 443 firmware 102 upgrade 391 439 flow control 114 back pressure 114 EEE802 3x 114 forwarding delay 163 frames tagged 125 untagged 125 front panel 37 FTP 31 393 file transfer procedure 394 restrictions over WAN 395 G GARP 118 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 118 GARP terminology 118 GARP timer 109 118 general features 468 general setup 104 getting help 56 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 105 GVRP 118 125 and port assignment 125 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 118 H hardware installation 33 mounting 34 hardware monitor 102 hardware overview 37 hello time 163 hops 163 HTTPS 415 certificates 415 implementation 415 public keys private keys 415 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index 484 HTTPS example 416 humidity 464 IEEE 802 1p priority 109 IEEE 802 1x activate 190 194 247 reauthentication 191 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 187 IGMP 349 how it works 346 overview 345 port based 347 setup 348 version 227 version 3 347 versions supported 346 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 227 346 IGMP filtering 227 profile 233 profiles 229 IGMP leave timeout fast 231 mormal 230 IGMP snooping 228 MVR 235 IGMP throttling 231 ingress port 135 Installation Rack mounting 34 installation freestanding 33 precautions 34 interface 334 and OSPF 341 interfa
337. lear 1 2 2 RADIUS server can be reached 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 148 AAA Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION accounting RADIUSAcctNotReachable 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when there is EventOn 1 2 1 no response message from the RADIUS accounting server 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 RADI USAcctNotReachable 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the EventClear 1 2 2 RADIUS accounting server can be reached 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 Table 149 SNMP IP Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed traceroute traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 150 SNMP Switch Traps
338. led A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Type a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitations the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100 1000M for a 1000Base T connection 10G for a 10 Gigabit Ethernet connection and 12G for a 10GBase CX4 connection in the XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EJ Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 14 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port The choices are Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex and 100M Full Duplex for a 1000Base T connection 1000M Full Duplex is supported by both 1000Base T and 1000Base X connections 10G Full Duplex is supported by the 10 Gigabit Ethernet connections 12G Full Duplex is supported by the 10GBase CX4 connections in the XGS 4528F or XGS 4728F Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch de
339. light Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the last Sunday of October Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation pan
340. ling multi login SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO Telnet forced out by local user SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO User username login SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO User username logout SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG NOTICE CLI user username login SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG NOTICE FTP authentication failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE Console authentication failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE HTTP s authentication failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE HTTP s authorization failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE SSH authentication failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE Telnet authentication failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE Telnet authorization failure username lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE 802 1x Authentication failure User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_NOTICE 802 1x Authorization failure User Name lt username gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x Authentication retransmit EAPOL START packet User Name lt username gt NAS Port lt port gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_AAA SYSLOG_WARNING 802 1x RADIUS server timeout User Name lt username gt
341. link within the trunk src mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source MAC address dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination MAC address src dst mac means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination MAC addresses src ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s source IP address dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on the packet s destination IP address src dst ip means the Switch distributes traffic based on a combination of the packet s source and destination IP addresses Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group e LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation 17 4 Link Aggregation Setting Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 17 1 on page 177 for more information on link aggregation Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting An qgregation Setting Status LACP Group ID Active Criteria T1 iv src dstmac T2 v src dstmac T3 go src dstmac T4 F src dstmac v T5 F stc
342. ll and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Set the Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 5 Attaching Rubber Feet XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 33 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection Note Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking Note For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Philips screwdriver Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 4 Precautions
343. llisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans Last ignored time None oio o io o Total ignored bindings counters Binding collisions Invalid interfaces Parse failures Expired leases Unsupported vlans oioio ioio XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 79 DHCP Snooping LABEL DESCRIPTION Database Status This section displays the current settings for the DHCP snooping database You can configure them in the DHCP Snooping Configure screen See Section 26 5 on page 269 Agent URL This field displays the location of the DHCP snooping database Write delay timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch tries to complete a specific update in the DHCP snooping database before it gives up Abort timer This field displays how long in seconds the Switch waits to update the DHCP snooping database after the current bindings change This section displays information about the current update and the next update of the DHCP snooping database Agent running This field displays the status of the current update or access of the DHCP snooping database none The Switch is not accessing the DHCP snooping database read The Switch is loading dynamic bindings from the DHCP snooping database write The Switch is updating the DHCP snooping dat
344. loopguard ARP M tana TEENE BPDU o 300 L1 IGMP 6 5 How to Set Up a Guest VLAN All ports on the Switch are in VLAN 1 by default Say you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication on ports 1 to 8 Clients that connect to these ports should provide the correct user name and password in order to access the ports You want to assign clients that connect to ports 1 2 or 3 to a guest VLAN 200 for example before they can authenticate with the authentication server In this guest VLAN clients can surf the Internet through the default gateway attached to port 10 but are not allowed to access other network resources such as the mail server or local data base prb VLAN 1 EE qu Guest VLAN 200 Internet 2 Ports 1 2 3 and 10 a XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 6 5 1 Creating a Guest VLAN Follow the steps below to configure port 1 2 3 and 10 as a member of VLAN 200 1 Access the web configurator through the Switch s management port 2 Go to Basic Setting gt Switch Setup and set the VLAN type to 802 1Q Click Apply to save the settings to the run time memory Switch Setup VLAN Type S mg C Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active Ci MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer po milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer e00 milliseconds Leave All Timer hooo milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 7 level jez level5
345. lowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Name Revision Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have Number the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 33 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning
346. lticast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR link to display the screen as shown next Note You can create up to five multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch Note Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 104 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR Anu sD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active O Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority o Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging 5 None z 1 e I 1 2 O c Cc a 3 oO C e Lj 4 C O E C 5 Cc e e C 6 O C e DL 7 O C e 1 c Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 66 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 237 Chapter 24 Multica
347. m for a multicast group member to notify a multicast router that it is leaving a multicast group The multicast router then sends a group specific IGMP query to check if there are any members remaining in that group If the multicast router does not receive an IGMP report from any members it stops sending multicast traffic to that group This change helps shorten the leave convergence time in other words the amount of time that a multicast router believes that there are group members XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 38 IGMP on a particular network This in turn helps reduce the amount of multicast traffic going through the multicast router Figure 170 IGMP Version 2 Example IGMP version 3 allows a multicast host to join a multicast group and specify from which source multicast server it wants to receive multicast packets Alternatively a multicast host can specify from which multicast servers it does not want to receive multicast packets In the following figure multicast server X IP address 10 1 1 1 and multicast server Z IP address 13 2 2 2 both send multicast traffic to the same multicast group identified by the multicast IP address 225 1 1 1 In IGMP version 3 multicast host A can join multicast group 225 1 1 1 and specify that it only wants to receive multicast packets from server X Figure 171 IGMP Version 3 Example Group 225 1 1 1 Server 13 2 2 2 38 2 Port based IGMP The Switch sends I GMP Q
348. me memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide m Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 19 1 About Port Security Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch The XGS 4728F can learn up to 16K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 16K The XGS 4526 or XGS 4528F can learn up to 8K MAC addresses in total with no limit on individual ports other than the sum cannot exceed 8K For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port It is not recommended you disable port security together with MAC address learning as this will result in many broadcasts By default MAC address learning is still enabled even though the port security is not activated XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 197 Chapter 19 Port Security 19 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as sho
349. mple Policy screen where you configure a policy to limit bandwidth and discard out of profile traffic on a traffic flow classified using the Example classifier refer to Section 20 4 on page 206 Figure 92 Policy Example Active Test Name Classifier s Egress Port 1 Parameters E Priority DSCP TOS Forwarding 9 No change Q Discard the packet Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Priority No change O Setthe packets 802 1p priority Send the packet to priority queue Replace the 802 1p priority field with the IP TOS value Diffserv No change O Setthe packets TOS field Replace the IP TOS field with the 802 1p priority value O Set the Diffserv Codepoint field in the frame Outgoing Action C Send the packet to the mirror port C Send the packet to the egress port Metering C Enable Drop the packet C Change the DSCP value C Set Out Drop Precedence Out of profile action C Do not drop the matching frame previously marked for dropping Metering Bandwidth Out of Profile DSCP EXAMPLE XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 21 Policy Rule XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Queuing Method This chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 22 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing
350. multiple networks Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 37 6 Configuring OSPF Interfaces To configure an OSPF interface first create an IP routing domain in the IP Setup screen see Section 8 6 on page 110 for more information Once you create an IP routing domain an OSPF interface entry is automatically created See Section 37 1 on page 331 for more information on OSPF In the OSPF Configuration screen click Interface to display the OSPF nterface screen Figure 166 P Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface Osa Configuration Network 192 168 1 1 24 gt Area ID 192 168 1 1 Authentication None x Key ID 1 Key Cost 15 Priority 1 Add Cancel Clear Index Network Area ID Authentication Key ID Cost Priority Delete 1 192 168 1 1 24 192 158 1 1 None 1 15 111 Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 121 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt OSPF Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Network Select an IP interface Area ID Select the area ID in an IP address format with dotted decimal notation of an area to associate the interface
351. n gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on MRSTP Figure 65 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP Multiple Rapid Spanning Iree Protoco Status Tree Active Bridge Priority Hello Time MAX Age Forwarding Delay 1 32768 v 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 2 32768 vw 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 3 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 4 32768 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 Active Edge Priority Path Cost Tree 128 s II v 128 2 lv O v 128 2 118 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MRSTP Status screen see Figure 64 on page 157 Tree This is a read only index number of the STP trees Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this checkbox to disable an STP tree Note You must also activate Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MRSTP on the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 31 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MRSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in de
352. n all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next Figure 30 Status NIE o D o v 1 amp 2 Clear Counter Any O Port Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts 1 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 2 1000M F Copper FORWARDING Disabled 0 108 d Down STOP Disabled 0 0 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 5 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 z Down STOP Disabled 0 0 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 10 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 11 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 12 STOP 0 0 Errors Tx KB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e cO o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 n Rx KB s 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Down Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Up Time 0 00 00 0 47 09 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 00 00 m XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics The following table describes the labels in this screen Table8 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 31 on page 97 Name This is the name you assigned to this port in the Basic Setting gt Port Setup screen Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10 Mbps 100M for 100 Mbps 1000M for 1000 Mbps and 10G for 10 Gbps and the duplex F for full duplex or H for
353. n index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP domain configured on the Switch Refer to Section 8 6 on page 110 for more information on configuring IP domains Version Select an IGMP version from the drop down list box The choices are I GMP v1 IGMP v2 IGMP v3 and None Generally if you want to enable IGMP on the Switch you should choose I GMP v3 as it is compatible with older versions Choose an earlier version of IGMP IGMP v2 or IGMP v1 if the multicast hosts on your network can not recognize IGMP version 3 or version 2 Query messages Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide DVMRP This chapter introduces DVMRP and tells you how to configure it 39 1 DVMRP Overview DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol is a protocol used for routing multicast data within an autonomous system AS This DVMRP implementation is based on draft ietf idmr dvmrp v3 10 DVMRP provides multicast forwarding capability to a layer 3 switch that runs both the IPv4 protocol with IP Multicast support and the IGMP protocol The DVMRP metric is a hop count of 32
354. n is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 9 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common IEEE 802 1Q VLAN terminology Table 15 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN Table 15 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Terminology continued Administrative Control VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Registration Forbidden Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing frames transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to
355. n of specific types of events RADIUS is the only method for IEEE 802 1x authorization Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting Is disabled Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH e Dotlx Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when a a of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the witch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it does
356. n t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the second accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Switch Chapter 25 AAA Table 71 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh
357. n the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port Throttling IGMP throttling controls how the Switch deals with the IGMP reports when the maximum number of the IGMP groups a port can join is reached Select Deny to drop any new IGMP join report received on this port until an existing multicast forwarding table entry is aged out Select Replace to replace an existing entry in the multicast forwarding table with the new IGMP report s received on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group You can create IGMP filtering profiles in the Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile screen IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP query port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave
358. nd authentication 244 Network example 244 server 244 settings 245 setup 245 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 147 reboot load configuration 391 reboot system 391 redistribute route 340 reducing routing table size 339 registration product 479 related documentation 3 remote management 420 service 421 trusted computers 421 resetting 54 390 to factory default settings 390 restoring configuration 54 392 Reverse Path Forwarding RPF 350 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 487 Index 488 Reverse Path Multicasting RPM 349 RFC 3164 425 RIP 340 configuration 328 direction 327 overview 327 version 327 vs OSPF 331 RIP Routing Information Protocol 327 Round Robin Scheduling 216 route cost 340 router ID 336 routing domain 110 373 routing protocols 469 routing table 453 RSTP 147 rubber feet 33 S safety warnings 7 save configuration 54 390 Secure Shell See SSH security 469 service access control 419 service port 420 sFlow 295 collector 297 configuration 296 datagram 295 overview 295 poll interval 297 sample rate 297 UDP port 298 sFlow agent 295 sFlow collector 295 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 31 398 agent 398 and MIB 398 authentication 410 411 communities 408 management model 398 manager 398 MIB 399 network components 398 object variables 398 protocol operations 399 security 410 411 setup 407 traps 409 users 410 version 3 and security 399 versions supported
359. ndex priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remov
360. net Explorer 3 Are you sure you want to load factory default j Cancel In the web configurator click the Save button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 45 3 Save Configuration Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings permanently to Configuration 1 on the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Alternatively click Save on the top right hand corner in any screen to save the configuration changes to the current configuration Note Clicking the Apply or Add button does NOT save the changes permanently All unsaved changes are erased after you reboot the Switch 45 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off It also allows you to load configuration one Config 1 or configuration two Config 2 when you reboot Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to reboot and load configuration one The following screen displays Figure 212 Reboot System Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer xj 2 Are you sure you want to reboot system i Cancel
361. net mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 On the Switch as a layer 3 device an IP address is not bound to any physical ports Since each IP address on the Switch must be in a separate subnet the configured IP address is also known as IP interface or routing domain In addition this allows routing between subnets based on the IP address without additional routers You can configure multiple routing domains on the same VLAN as long as the IP address ranges for the domains do not overlap To change the IP address of the XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Switch in a routing domain simply add a new routing domain entry with a different IP address in the same subnet Figure 35 Basic Setting gt IP Setup CIP Setup Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default Management in band Outof band Management IP Address IP Address 192 168 0 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel IP Interface IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 VID Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Delete 1 192 168 1 12 255 255 255 0 1 B Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Type the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal Gateway notation for examp
362. ng collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the port number was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore Last ignored time This field displays the last time the Switch ignored any bindings for any reason from the DHCP binding database Total ignored bindings counters This section displays the reasons the Switch has ignored bindings any time it read bindings from the DHCP binding database You can clear these counters by restarting the Switch or using CLI commands See the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide Binding collisions This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch already had a binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID Invalid interfaces This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the port number
363. ning 109 127 129 137 199 specify limit 199 MAC authentication 188 aging time 195 MAC filter and ARP inspection 262 MAC freeze 198 MAC table 443 how it works 443 viewing 444 maintanence configuration backup 393 firmware 391 restoring configuration 392 maintenance 389 current configuration 389 main screen 389 Management Information Base MIB 398 management port 135 managing the device good habits 31 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 262 max age 163 hops 163 metric 340 MIB and SNMP 398 supported MI Bs 399 MIB Management Information Base 398 mini GBIC ports 39 connection speed 39 connector type 39 transceiver installation 39 transceiver removal 40 mirroring ports 175 monitor port 175 176 mounting brackets 34 MSA MultiSource Agreement 39 MST Instance See MSTI 151 MST region 151 MSTI 151 MST ID 151 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 150 MSTP 147 150 bridge ID 167 configuration 162 165 configuration digest 167 forwarding delay 163 Hello Time 167 hello time 163 Max Age 167 max age 163 max hops 163 MST region 151 network example 150 path cost 164 port priority 164 revision level 163 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 147 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index 486 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 106 multicast
364. nk is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 This trap is sent when the 2 2 Ethernet link is up 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 2 2 linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down autonegotiati on AutonegotiationFailedEven tOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEven tClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 31 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 31 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 31 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface Ildp lldpRemTablesChange 1 0 8802 1 1 2 0 0 1 The trap is sent when entries in the remote database have any updates Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP defined as IEEE 802 1ab enables LAN devices that support LLDP to exchange their configured settings This helps eliminate configuration mismatch issues XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 147 SNMP InterfaceTraps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID D
365. nnected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 76 Trunking Example Physical Connections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting n this screen activate trunk group T1 select the traffic distribution algorithm used by this group and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done Figure 77 Trunking Example Configuration Screen tnt Group ID Active Criteria Status LACP T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 src dsttmac src dstmac kaiia src dstmac Mai src dstmac takiciamridkbimunsd 70 ra pum T9 src dstmac v T10 T11 T12 src dstmac o Fi Fj o o T7 F src dstmac v Fi o oO F O EXAMPLE Reply Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 17 Link Aggregation XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 18 1 18 1 1 Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x and MAC authentication methods Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports the following methods for port authentication IEEE 802 1x An authentication server valida
366. nnel PPTP_TUNNEL User Defined 47 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling GRE Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks This is the data channel RCMD TCP 512 Remote Command Service REAL_AUDIO TCP 7070 A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web REXEC TCP 514 Remote Execution Daemon RLOGI N TCP 513 Remote Login RTELNET TCP 107 Remote Telnet RTSP TCP UDP 554 The Real Time Streaming media control Protocol RTSP is a remote control for multimedia on the Internet SFTP TCP 115 Simple File Transfer Protocol SMTP TCP 25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message exchange standard for the Internet SMTP enables you to move messages from one e mail server to another SNMP TCP UDP 161 Simple Network Management Program SNMP TRAPS TCP UDP 162 Traps for use with the SNMP RFC 1215 SQL NET TCP 1521 Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems including mainframes midrange systems UNIX systems and network servers SSH TCP UDP 22 Secure Shell Remote Login Program STRM WORKS UDP 1558 Stream Works Protocol SYSLOG UDP 514 Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server TACACS UDP 49 Login Host Protocol used for Terminal Access Controller Access Control System XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 475 Appendix A Common Services 476 Table 175 Commonly Used Services continued NAME PROT
367. no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 43 1 2 ARP Learning Mode The Switch supports three ARP learning modes ARP Reply Gratuitous ARP and ARP Request XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 ARP Learning 43 1 2 1 ARP Reply By default the Switch is in ARP Reply learning mode and updates the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP requests sent by the Switch This can help prevent ARP spoofing In the following example the Switch does not have IP address and MAC address mapping information for hosts A and B in its ARP table and host A wants to ping host B Host A sends an ARP request to the Switch and then sends an ICMP request after getting the ARP reply from the Switch The Switch finds no matched entry for host B in the
368. ns with the same VLAN ID are not displayed in the table indicated Figure 195 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface OBST Status Index 1 Network Authentication 192 168 1 10 24 None j Apply Cancel 374 Active 1 Name name Network 192 168 1 10 24 Virtual Router ID fi gt Adertisement Interval fi Preempt Mode IV Priority foo Uplink Gateway nono Primary Virtual IP nono Secondary Virtual IP noon Index X Active Name Network VRID Primary VIP Uplink Gateway Priority Delete 1 Yes Example Add Cancel Clear 192 168 1 10 24 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1100 110 n Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 136 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt IP Interface LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and number of subnet mask bit of an IP domain Authenticati on Select None to disable authentication This is the default setting Select Simple to use a simple password to authenticate VRRP packet exchanges on this interface Key When you select Simple in the Authentication field enter a password key up to eight printable ASCII character long in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save
369. number Table 51 Common Ethernet Types and Protocol Number ETHERNET TYPE PROTOCOL NUMBER IP ETHII 0800 X 75 Internet 0801 NBS Internet 0802 ECMA Internet 0803 Chaosnet 0804 X 25 Level 3 0805 XNS Compat 0807 Banyan Systems OBAD BBN Simnet 5208 IBM SNA 80D5 AppleTalk AARP 80F3 Some of the most common IP ports are Table 52 Common IP Ports e ea PORT NAME 21 FTP 23 Telnet 25 SMTP 53 DNS 80 HTTP 110 POP3 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier 20 4 Classifier Example The following screen shows an example of configuring a classifier that identifies all traffic from MAC address 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 on port 2 Figure 89 Classifier Example Classifier Active Vv Name Example Packet Format All G Any VLAN c Any Prior C 0 AI Ethernet Type C others Hex Layer 2 MAC Add ids ress C mac 00 50 ba ea 4f a1 Sourc Port OAN o Ol 2 Destinat MAC Add ills estination ress C MAC DSCP i ay SC c 1 h AI Establish Only IP Protocol C others Dec IP Address 0 0 0 0 lama Address Prefix Source wn e Any ocket Number C IP Address ooo pe Address Prefix ADU i Destination c Any Socket Number Cc E Add Cancel Clear EXAMPLE After you have configured a classifier you can configure a policy
370. numeric characters to identify this subnet based VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 127 Chapter 9 VLAN Table 20 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting gt Subnet Based VLAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Enter the IP address of the subnet for which you want to configure this subnet based VLAN Mask Bits Enter the bit number of the subnet mask To find the bit number convert the subnet mask to binary format and add all the 1 s together Take 255 255 255 0 for example 255 converts to eight 1s in binary There are three 255s so add three eights together and you get the bit number 24 VID Enter the ID of a VLAN with which the untagged frames from the IP subnet specified in this subnet based VLAN are tagged This must be an existing VLAN which you defined in the Advanced Applications gt VLAN screens Priority Select the priority level that the Switch assigns to frames belonging to this VLAN Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Index This is the index number identifying this subnet based VLAN Click on any of these numbers to edit an existing su
371. o make the Circuit ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Remote id Select this option to make the Remote ID settings for a specific VLAN take effect Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Error Disable This chapter shows you how to configure the rate limit for control packets on a port and set the Switch to take an action such as to shut down a port or stop sending packets on a port when the Switch detects a pre configured error It also shows you how to configure the Switch to automatically undo the action after the error is gone 32 1 CPU Protection Overview Switches exchange protocol control packets in a network to get the latest networking information If a switch receives large numbers of control packets such as ARP BPDU or IGMP packets which are to be processed by the CPU the CPU may become overloaded and be unable to handle regular tasks properly The CPU protection feature allows you to limit the rate of ARP BPDU and IGMP packets to be delivered to the CPU on a port This enhances the CPU efficiency and protects against potential DoS attacks or errors from other network s You then
372. o the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the priority level Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen Note A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 105 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Settin
373. oae eiai iiA 377 Jad VRRP siis iris rimis e 377 42 4 1 One Subnet Network EXAmMPIE icis aes sereno iaaiiai aaeain 378 493 2 Two Subners EXSID IE 2 arie bom ii odo a a RI 379 Chapter 43 ARP LEANING OoO A 381 A3 ABP CIVI serieen ded GER UEBER DEP Y RO URBE UP E RU po ado 381 chal Po umbo fec pr TT 381 O12 AAP Leaning WN c a aaa 381 43 2 Configuring ABP Learning s nccswvssanedessinnecewobsssneeteeiiinnestwelianeesdnbessneeeeouendnnceddacisandeaweciinnes 384 Chapter 44 Load SMAriMi sscicctccccsccseciciveccciesccisescchasccreasanetienadccrerahiaesciandcaresacuectasieadanearsiueddcneicadcasaziassaanis 387 LUE C Ecc Rer s rc 387 44 2 Configuring Load Sharing ssa ceviin rdi es CI ii martinis CIERRE CUAL VR tan CR E 387 Chapter 45 L lur 9 E E7952 A5 389 25 1 The Maintenance OBS siriene e A latu du sot ddibE eee 389 452 Lond Facloiy DST zuonuiendnsd n m qiebenE Ro Pup ovi Prnt Des CO vp RR wales 390 TS a dabei e ENTE E OD D 390 AGA TODO o M 391 35 5 Pudbvaie LIBE uud laeccnpina pipe Vade ERU CP a aids a Rcgc aae A8 aad ud YS aaa 391 45 6 Restore a GConigureloki File 1 iieiioeat duds pe Stadio Ree odds be n Ui dd DEP P d dg been did Lupe adake 392 45 7 Backup a Configuration A m 393 25 8 FIPE Om LE asa reotssdsaseribsiaiin dries iaaecolaniadibaatinaccetinmadduslirauentbiuiaeiei
374. od broadcast packets received Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received Control This field shows the number of control packets received including those with CRC error but it does not include the 802 3x Pause packets TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received that were in error XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 7 System Status and Port Statistics Table 9 Status gt Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Length This field shows the number of packets received with a length that was out of range Runt This field shows the number of pa
375. of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the configuration file do the following 1 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 2 on page 41 for details 2 Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen 3 When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode 4 Type atic after the Enter Debug Mode message 5 Wait for the Starting XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal 6 After a configuration file upload type atgo to restart the Switch Figure 22 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port Bootbase Version V1 00 10 22 2007 12 48 50 RAM Size 128 Mbytes DRAM POST Testing 131072K OK DRAM Test SUCCESS FLASH Intel 64M ZyNOS Version V4 00 BBC 0 b1 10 14 2010 17 32 18 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC Total 393216 bytes received Erasing ras atgo XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The Switch is now reinitialized with
376. of the screen 2 Select Untrusted for port 5 and enter userC as Circuit id and 00134900000A as Remote id Select Trusted for port 12 and then leave the other fields empty Click Apply Port VLAN Intermediate Agent Port Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted 1 Untrusted Untrusted v 2 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted v 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted 8 Untrusted 3 Untrusted i 19 Untrusted i 11 Untrusted v Eere ae are se 12 Trusted v 13 Untrusted 14 Linirusted i 1 5 Untrusted userC 00134900000A Then Click I ntermediate Agent on the top of the screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 3 Thelntermediate Agent screen appears Click VLAN on the top of the screen c Sn Port PPPoE Active access node identifier XGS 4728F circuit id Active o identifier string option spv delimiter v E 4 Enter 1 for both Start VI D and End VID since both the Switch and PPPoE server are in VLAN 1 in this example Click Apply AU ED Show VLAN VID Intermediate Agent start VID 1 End VID 1 Apply Enabled Circuit id Remote id No L1 L1 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to
377. ogins for HTTP or Telnet If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details 3 Disconnect and re connect the cord to the Switch 4 Ifthis does not work you have to reset the device to its factory defaults See Section 4 6 on page 54 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default cannot see some of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels Adjust the value in your computer and then you should see the rest of Advanced Application submenus at the bottom of the navigation panel There is unauthorized access to my Switch via telnet HTTP and SSH Click the Display button in the System Log field in the Management gt Diagnostic screen to check for unauthorized access to your Switch To avoid unauthorized access configure the secured client setting in the Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management screen for telnet HTTP and SSH see Section 46 11 on page 420 Computers not belonging to the secured client set cannot get permission to access the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 55 Troubleshooting 55 3 Switch Configuration
378. om and it stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off See Section 45 3 on page 390 for information on saving your settings to a specific configuration file C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch D Click this link to log out of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT MENU N MENU Basic Setting Basic Setting Adva Application Advanced Application IP Application IP Application Management Management Management Management System Info VLAN x Static Routing R Maintenance General Setup Static MAC Forwarding Policy Routing Access Control Switch Setup Static Multicast Forwarding RIP Diagnostic IP Setup Filtering OSPF Syslog Port Setup Spanning Tree Protocol IGMP Cluster Management Bandwidth Control DVMRP MAC Table Broadcast Storm Control DiffServ IP Table Mirroring DHCP ARP Table Link Aggregation VRRP Routing Table Port Authentication ARP Learning Configure Clone Port Security Load Sharing Classifier Policy Rule Queuing Method VLAN Stacking Multicast AAA IP Source Guard Loop Guard VLAN Mapping Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling
379. omains Network This is the IP routing domain IP address and subnet mask you set up in IP Setup VID DVMRP cannot be enabled on the same VLAN group across different IP routing domains that is you cannot have duplicate VIDs for different DVMRP configurations see Figure 177 on page 352 Active Select Active to enable DVMRP on this IP routing domain Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 39 3 1 DVMRP Configuration Error Messages You must have IGMP enabled when you enable DVMRP otherwise you see the screen as in the next figure Figure 175 DVMRP IGMP Not Set Error auum Error IGMP should be turned on before setting DVMRP Back When you disable IGMP but DVMRP is still active you also see another warning screen Figure 176 DVMRP Unable to Disable IGMP Error error Warning DVMRP is still enabled DVMRP will not function if IGMP is turned off Back XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 39 DVMRP Each IP routing domain DVMRP configuration must be in a different VLAN group otherwise you see the following screen Figure 177 DVMRP Duplicate VID Er
380. omeone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 Note It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to view the screen as shown Figure 221 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Logins Access Control Administrator Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 154 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default administrator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to Retype your new system password for confirmation confirm XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 154 Management gt Access Control gt Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTIO
381. on XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 107 Chapter 8 Basic Setting Note The uplink port connected to the Internet should be the root port Otherwise with smart isolation enabled the isolated ports cannot access the Internet 8 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting and then Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 34 Basic Setting Switch Setup qo EVES aD VLAN Type Boang Port Based Bridge Control Protocol Transparency Active O Smart Isolation Active MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Join Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment Level 7 Level amp Bv Level5 5v Level4 4 w Level3 3 v Level2 ty Levelt lo Level 2 v The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more information Bridge Control Select Active to allow the Switch to handle bridging control protocols Protocol STP for example You also need to define how to treat a BPDU in
382. on volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 30 2 1 sFlow Collector Configuration Click the Collector link in the sFlow screen to display the screen as shown You can configure up to four sFlow collectors in this screen You may want to configure more than one collector if the traffic load to be monitored is more than one collector can manage Figure 142 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector xu NEN Port Collector Collector Address 0 0 0 0 UDP Port 6343 Add Cancel Clear Index Collector Address UDP Port Delete E 1 2 3 4 5343 Delete Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 297 Chapter 30 sFlow The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 Advanced Application gt sFlow gt Collector LABEL DESCRIPTION Collector Enter the IP address of the sFlow collector Address UDP Port Enter a UDP port number the Switch uses to send sFlow datagram to the collector If you change the port here make sure you change it on the collector too The default port is 6343 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Canc
383. on gt Private VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 317 Chapter 33 Private VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Static Route This chapter shows you how to configure static routes 34 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet To have the Switch send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway use static routes For example the next figure shows a computer A connected to the Switch The Switch routes most traffic from A to the Internet through the Switch s default gateway R1 You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2 You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the Switch Figure 154 Example of Static Routing Topology A R1 di ldil C Internet C R3 N B l qu n e SS 1 gt i Qin T Neue rus NS XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 34 Static Route 34 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 155 IP Appli
384. on such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a Switch IP address in each routing domain subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for management purposes The Port Setup screen allows you to enable or disable a port on the Switch and configure the port settings such as the speed and duplex mode XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 2 System Information In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System I nfo to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage in this screen Figure 32 Basic Setting gt System Info xincdu cM System Name XGS 4728F Product Model XGS 4728F ZyNOS FW Version V4 00 BBC 0 b3 20101130 11 30 2010 Ethernet Address 00 19 cb 6f 91 59 Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C Y Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status BOARD 40 0 41 0 40 0 75 0 Normal PHY 34 0 34 0 33 0 85 0 Normal MAC 44 0 44 0 43 0 85 0 Normal F
385. on an untrusted port the Switch adds a vendor specific tag to the packet and then forwards it to the trusted port s The Switch discards PADO and PADS packets which are sent from a PPPoE server but received on an untrusted port Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for PPPoE discovery packets received on this port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a VLAN on a port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3
386. on on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message I OO Om AJ WN RF oO Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog 48 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings Figure 232 Management Syslog NK OXTH DEDSTNEENNDP Syslog Logging type System Interface Switch ABA IP Syslog Server Setup Active Active Facility iv local use 0 v local use 0 local use 0 local use 0 v local use 0 Xl X 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 159 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save
387. on the specified criteria Policy Rule This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the Switch to perform special treatment on the grouped packets Queuing This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with Method associated queue weights for each port VLAN Stacking This link takes you to screens where you can activate and configure VLAN stacking Multicast This link takes you to screen where you can configure various multicast features IGMP snooping and create multicast VLANs AAA This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication authorization and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source This link takes you to screens where you can configure filtering of Guard unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide E Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION VLAN Mapping This link takes you to screens where you can configure VLAN mapping settings on the Switch Layer 2 This link takes you to a screen where you can configure L2PT La
388. ontrol 408 Table 151 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with Community each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Destination Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Username Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in the Management Access Control SNMP User screen Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the S
389. op s MAC address Discover Time Specify the time interval from 0 to 86400 in increments of 10 in seconds at which the Switch sends an ARP request to update an unresolved next hop s MAC address Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 45 1 The Maintenance Screen Use this screen to manage firmware and your configuration files Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 210 Management gt Maintenance ED Maintenance d Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Config 2 Reboot System Config 1 Config 2 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 141 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays which configuration Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 is cur
390. op state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide VLAN Mapping This chapter shows you how to configure VLAN mapping on the Switch 28 1 VLAN Mapping Overview With VLAN mapping enabled the Switch can map the VLAN ID and priority level of packets received from a private network to those used in the service provider s network The Switch checks incoming traffic from the switch ports non management ports against the VLAN mapping table first the MAC learning table and then the VLAN table before forwarding them through the Gigabit uplink port When VLAN mapping is enabled the Switch discards the tagged packets that do not match an entry in the VLAN mapping table If the incoming packets are untagged the Switch adds a PVID based on the VLAN setting Note You can not enable VLAN mapping and VLAN stacking at the same time 28 1 1 VLAN Mapping Example In the following example figure packets that carry VLAN ID 12 and are received on port 3 m
391. ority Delete 192 168 1 100 110 E Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 138 VRRP Configuring VRRP Parameters LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the index number of an entry Active This field shows whether a VRRP entry is enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays a descriptive name of an entry Network This field displays the IP address and subnet mask of an interface VRID This field displays the ID number of a virtual router Primary VIP This field displays the IP address of the primary virtual router Uplink This field displays the IP address of the uplink gateway Gateway Priority This field displays the priority level 1 to 255 of the entry Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 42 4 VRRP Configuration Examples The following sections show two VRRP configuration examples on the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 377 Chapter 42 VRRP 42 4 1 One Subnet Network Example The figure below shows a simple VRRP network with only one virtual router VR1 VRID 1 and two switches The network is connected to the WAN via an uplink gateway G 172 21 1 100 The host computer X is set to use VR1 as the default gateway Figure 198 VRRP Configuration Example One Virtual Router Network EN 192 168 1 1 17
392. ort basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this checkbox to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 18 Port Authentication Table 44 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Req Specify the number of times the Switch tries to authenticate client s before sending unresponsive ports to the Guest VLAN This is set to 2 by default That is the Switch attempts to authenticate a client twice If the client does not respond to the first authentication request the Switch tries again If the client still does not respond to the second request the Switch sends the client to the Guest VLAN The client needs to send a new request to be authenticated by the Switch again Reauth Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Reauth period Specify the length of time required to pass before a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Quiet period Specify the number of seconds the port remains in the HELD state and rejects further authentication requests from the connected client after a failed authentication exchange Tx period
393. ort s The Switch also uses this to check if the received frames are double tagged The value of this field is 0x8100 as defined in IEEE 802 1Q If the Switch needs to communicate with other vendors devices they should use the same TPID Note You can define up to four different tunnel TPIDs including 8100 in this screen at a time Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 23 4 1 Port based Q in Q Port based Q in Q lets the Switch treat all frames received on the same port as the same VLAN flows and add the same outer VLAN tag to them even they have different customer VLAN IDs XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 223 Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking Click Port based QinQ in the Advanced Application VLAN Stacking screen to display the screen as shown Figure 96 Advanced Application VLAN Stacking Port based QinQ Port OQ 9 Hn 0O fF wines ED Port based Qin VLAN Stacking Se ee Wm uli cn a n um cnc SPVID a S 2 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt VLAN Stacking gt Port based QinQ L
394. ory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off Note Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from using in band management managing through the data ports if you do one of the following 1 Delete the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Delete all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filter all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disable all ports 5 Misconfigure the text configuration file 6 Forget the password and or IP address 7 Prevent all services from accessing the Switch 8 Change a service port number but forget it Note Be careful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch If you do lock yourself out try using out of band management via the management port to configure the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the administrator password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 6 1 Reload the Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed
395. ot discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high You can specify the maximum rate at which ARP packets can arrive on untrusted ports Limit Rate and Burst Interval settings have no effect on trusted ports Rate pps Specify the maximum rate 1 2048 packets per second at which the Switch receives ARP packets from each port The Switch discards any additional ARP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 279 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 87 ARP Inspection Port Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Burst interval seconds The burst interval is the length of time over which the rate of ARP packets is monitored for each port For example if the Rate is 15 pps and the burst interval is 1 second then the Switch accepts a maximum of 15 ARP packets in every one second interval If the burst interval is 5 seconds then the Switch accepts a maximum of 75 ARP packets in every five second interval Enter the length 1 15 seconds of the burst interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation p
396. oup to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays Server or Relay for the DHCP mode DHCP Status For DHCP server configuration this field displays the starting IP address and the size of the IP address pool For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 41 5 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 191 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs mmm T cS p mmnnnnnnn e PELLEN EX E DHCP 172 23 10 100 i m XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 370 For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown Figure 192 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example ED VLAN Setting aD Status VID e Cc DHCP Status dnd Relay Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 0 0 0 Size of Client IP Pool EXEX IP
397. outing domain you need to create a XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example new IP interface This allows the Switch to route traffic between the RD and Sales networks Figure 24 Initial Setup Network Example IP Interface P A g b E e z Y eee Connect your computer to the MGMT port that is used only for management Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the MGMT port Open your web browser and enter 192 168 0 1 the default MGMT port IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on 1 2 page 47 for more information 3 Click Basic Setting and I P Setup in the navigation panel 4 Configure the related fields in the I P Setup screen AE NEN Default Gateway Domain Name Server Default Management Management IP Address IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway P Interface IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Index IP Address 1 192 168 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 in band C Outof band 182 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Apply Cancel 132 158 2 1 255 255 255 0 2 Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Delete Cancel VID 1 a EXAMPLE Delete For the Sales network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 Inthe VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to
398. ower so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on RSTP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol Note This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second D 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Delay second Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switc
399. pecific VLAN Click the VLAN link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 147 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN Ru ED Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id i No oO O 123 No CO o 124 Yes v v v 125 No F L1 126 No F E 127 No L1 g 128 No a O XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 307 Chapter 31 PPPoE The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 103 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Show VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to configure in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to configure in the section below Apply Click Apply to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Use this row to make the setting the same for all VLANs Use this row first and then make adjustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Enabled Select this option to turn on the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a VLAN Circuit id Select this option t
400. per cable amini GBIC slot compatible with Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Multi Source Agreement MSA transceivers to be used with 1000Base X fiber cables For each Dual Personality interface one port or slot is active at a time Two stacking ports XGS 4528F and XGS 4728F only One optional uplink module set One local management Ethernet 10 100Base T port One RS 232 console port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 171 Hardware Specifications Ethernet Ports Auto negotiating 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode 1000 Mbps and 10 Gbps in full duplex Auto crossover Use either crossover or straight through Ethernet cables Auto MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3ad u x Back pressure flow control for half duplex Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x LEDs Main switch BPS PWR SYS ALM Per Stacking port S1 S2 XGS 4528F and XGS 4728F only Per mini GBIC port green LED Per 1000Base T port Green 10 1000 Mbps Amber 100 Mbps mini GBI C 1000Base T LEDs steady link state blinking transmitting receiving Operating Environment Temperature 09 C 459 C 322 F 113 F Humidity 10 9096 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 109 C 702 C 132 F 158 F Humidity 10 9096 non condensing Ground Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger Power Wire Gauge 18 AWG or larger
401. port the Switch checks if a tag is added already and the IP subnet it came from The untagged packets from the same IP subnet are then placed in the same subnet based VLAN One advantage of using subnet based VLANs is that priority can be assigned to traffic from the same IP subnet For example an ISP Internet Service Provider may divide different types of services it provides to customers into different IP subnets Traffic for voice services is designated for IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 video for 192 168 1 0 24 and data for 10 1 1 0 24 The Switch can then be configured to group incoming traffic based on the source IP subnet of incoming frames You can then configure a subnet based VLAN with priority 6 and VID of 100 for traffic received from IP subnet 172 16 1 0 24 voice services You can also have a subnet based VLAN with priority 5 and VID of 200 for traffic received from IP subnet 192 168 1 0 24 video services Lastly you can configure VLAN with priority 3 and VID of 300 for traffic received from IP subnet 10 1 1 0 24 data services All untagged incoming frames will be classified based on their source IP subnet and prioritized accordingly That is video services receive the highest priority and data the lowest Figure 43 Subnet Based VLAN Application Example HHIHHOHHEIH Internet b Untagged Frames E SEEN Uil 10 1 1 0 24 VID 300 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN 9 7 Con
402. port 1 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 1 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 4 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 1 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID N i L fc Internet WY i i ry N gt VLAN 1 N VLAN2 F i m am i m i EJ Ss Ss Se een _ IONO SEENE A 1 Click Advanced Applications NEMS Subnet Based Vlan Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status and VLAN in the navigation GVRP panel Then click the VLAN Port Setting link Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP AcceptableFrame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation All 1 2 All 2 1 Al 3 1 Al 4 1 All 5 1 All 6 1 All 7 1 8 1 9 1 1 2 Enter 2 in the PVID field for port 1 and click Apply to save your changes back to the run
403. preempt mode Priority Enter a number between 1 and 254 to set the priority level The bigger the number the higher the priority This field is 100 by default Uplink Gateway Enter the IP address of the uplink gateway in dotted decimal notation The Switch checks the link to the uplink gateway Primary Virtual IP Enter the IP address of the primary virtual router in dotted decimal notation Secondary Virtual IP This field is optional Enter the IP address of a secondary virtual router in dotted decimal notation This field is ignored when you enter 0 0 0 0 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 42 VRRP Table 137 IP Application gt VRRP Configuration gt VRRP Parameters continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes made in this table Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults 42 3 4 Configuring VRRP Parameters View the VRRP configuration summary at the bottom of the screen Figure 197 VRRP Configuration Summary 1 Yes Index Actie Name Example Network VRID 192 168 1 10 24 1 Primary VIP 192 168 1 1 Uplink Gateway Pri
404. r data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA website for more information IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 227 Chapter 24 Multicast 24 1 3 24 1 4 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on I GMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration information and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast
405. r rra nnum ut rta rei etna 293 Chapter 30 BOW 295 US US FN ge 0 e mt 295 202 SFW Pert comigul allele cercle ER Re bg tl tender Ra pU a RED Er up rta ia TER Rd 296 20 2 1 gElper Collector GoDIOUEFeibl soeia oH SR ERU I von UO E Ni Eai 297 Chapter 31 mimi T ER 299 24 1 PPPOE Intermediate Agent Overview 2 eit pecie as inai NA aaan 299 31 1 1 PPPoE Intermediate Agent Tag Format c ccceesseeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseneeeeee 299 lhe eet ATION edi ETE S mE 300 21 15 POLOS aerssstoppisik E erhoabed ee anteater 301 mL Heg PPPSESCISB casttecidinbeiide d dibireee rere EE 302 31 3 PPPOE Intenmodiate Agent isses renean ERet aaa i aaaesansacnerbaincniag 302 21 5 1 FPEPSE A POr POE 2220 ant tnl o DeL D SIL EE Su casbEa ocn ck DOS pM ERE rab apu DR ERE 303 S12 PPPOE IA For Pon PRR LAN accedie 305 Bie PPP Oe IA Tor VEAN aynisini r bbb ta pt cape d eh A 307 Chapter 32 i40 sironnan 309 med OPU Prolecon DUI Ls ids rase ta p top ates istnd dta tete dane Eid ase sr t dta buPbY fautes ad tuteud 309 222 Eio Disable Megcovey OUBIMVIDU 4c teescec tee teet asd putes E m ee an a AME eb Na PM I ii 309 28 9 Me Eror DISODIG So DOE pueden didascpasei riu Fera unii aui A ddr Dd aO saci 310 pe APL Pretechom oonflgarstilR sispeexsndisstesestueiokbee a te e gUM rea edd caua arie 310 22 5 Eier Disable Detect GODINIBESUON 1t basti en p
406. raffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time critical application such as video on demand A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the Source address destination address source port number destination port number or incoming port number For example you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port such as Telnet to form a flow Configure QoS on the Switch to group and prioritize application traffic and fine tune network performance Setting up QoS involves two separate steps Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows Configure policy rules to define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow refer to Chapter 21 on page 207 to configure policy rules 20 2 Configuring the Classifier Use the Classifier screen to define the classifiers After you define the classifier you can specify actions or policy to act upon the traffic that matches the rules To configure policy rules refer to Chapter 21 on page 207 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Click Advanced Application Classifier in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Classifier Classifier Active E Name Packet Format Au X VLAN Any cf P
407. raffic flows Platinum Gold Silver Bronze based on the configured marking rules A network administrator can then apply various traffic policies to the traffic flows For example one traffic policy would be to give higher drop precedence to one traffic flow over others In our example packets in the Bronze traffic flow are more likely to be dropped when congestion occurs than the packets in the Platinum traffic flow as they move across the DiffServ network Figure 179 DiffServ Network A E Ld O00000 Jalala P Platinum G Gold IB S Silver IB B Bronze 40 2 Two Rate Three Color Marker Traffic Policing Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user defined criteria Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user defined criteria and identify it as either conforming exceeding or violating the criteria Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM defined in RFC 2698 is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user defined rates the Committed Information Rate CIR and the Peak Information Rate PIR The CIR XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 40 Differentiated Services specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotia
408. rebroadcast from B Figure 130 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 131 Loop Guard Probe Packet q ms The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 27 Loop Guard port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 132 Loop Guard Network Loop
409. reen and then the VLAN Port c OME VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VLAN Search by VID The Number of VLAN 4 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 2 59 05 Static 2 102 2 59 05 Static 3 123 2 59 05 Static 200 0 00 07 Static 9 Enter 200 in the PVI D field for ports 1 2 3 and 10 to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on these ports so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials 10 Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory EDINE Subnet Based Vian Protocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP L1 Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation O E All e O O 1 O a O O 2 E Oo O oO 3 O m o 4 1 1 o All v o oO 5 oO 1 o All Y O L 6 O 1 al All M O L1 7 1 1 o All v L1 O 8 1 E All v Fj go 9 1 o All 3 o U m o Al o C e a eed wed Il EET 11 Click the Save link in the upper right corner of the web configurator to save your configuration permanently 6 5 2 Enabling IEEE 802 1x Port Authentication Follow the steps below to enable port authentication to validate access to ports 1 8 to clients based on a RADIUS server 1 Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication and then the Click Here link for 802 1x LARTER 802 1x Click here MAC Authentication Click here XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Gu
410. regation Protocol see PAgP port authentication 187 and RADIUS 245 EEE802 1x 190 194 247 MAC authentication 188 port based I GMP 347 port based VLAN type 108 port cloning 455 456 advanced settings 455 456 basic settings 455 456 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index port details 97 port isolation 135 port mirroring 175 176 468 direction 176 egress 176 ingress 176 port redundancy 178 port security 197 address learning 199 limit MAC address learning 199 MAC address learning 197 overview 197 setup 198 285 293 port setup 113 port status 95 port VLAN trunking 119 port based VLAN 132 all connected 135 port isolation 135 settings wizard 135 ports standby 178 diagnostics 424 mirroring 175 speed duplex 114 power voltage 103 power module current rating 43 power wire 43 power specification 463 power status 103 power wires 43 PPPoE IA 72 trusted ports 301 untrusted ports 301 priority level 109 priority and OSPF 333 priority queue assignment 109 private VLAN 315 configuration 316 isolated port 315 overview 315 promiscuous port 315 product registration 479 protocol based VLAN 128 and IEEE 802 1Q tagging 128 example 131 hexadecimal notation for protocols 127 130 isolate traffic 128 priority 127 130 PVID 118 125 PVID Priority Frame 118 Q QoS 468 and classifier 201 queue weight 216 queuing 215 SPQ 216 WFQ 216 WRR 216 queuing method 215 218 R RADIUS 244 advantages 244 a
411. registration 118 ID 117 ingress filtering 125 introduction 106 number of VLANs 121 port number 122 port settings 124 port based VLAN 132 port based all connected 135 port based isolation 135 port based wizard 135 static VLAN 122 status 121 122 tagged 117 trunking 119 125 type 108 120 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 106 VLAN mapping 287 activating 288 configuration 289 example 287 priority level 287 tagged 287 traffic flow 287 untagged 287 VLAN ID 287 VLAN number 112 VLAN stacking 219 221 configuration 222 example 219 frame format 221 port roles 220 223 port based Q in Q 223 priority 221 selective Q in Q 224 VLAN Trunking Protocol see VTP VLAN protocol based See protocol based VLAN VLAN subnet based See subnet based VLANs 126 VRID Virtual Router ID 372 VRRP 371 advertisement interval 375 authentication 374 backup router 371 configuration example 377 Hello message 375 how it works 371 interface setup 373 master router 371 network example 371 378 parameters 375 preempt mode 375 376 priority 375 376 status 372 uplink gateway 376 uplink status 373 Virtual Router 371 Virtual Router ID 376 VRID 372 VSA 252 VTP 294 W warranty 479 note 479 web configurator 31 47 getting help 56 layout 48 login 47 logout 56 navigation panel 50 weight queuing 216 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR 216 WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing 216
412. rently operating on the Switch Firmware Click Click Here to go to the Firmware Upgrade screen Upgrade Restore Click Click Here to go to the Restore Configuration screen Configurati on Backup Click Click Here to go to the Backup Configuration screen Configurati on Load Click Click Here to reset the configuration to the factory default settings Factory Default XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 45 Maintenance 45 2 Table 141 Management Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration Configurati 1 on the Switch on Click Config 2 to save the current configuration settings to Configuration 2 on the Switch Reboot Click Config 1 to reboot the system and load Configuration 1 on the System Switch Click Config 2 to reboot the system and load Configuration 2 on the Switch Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults In the Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults Click OK to reset all Switch configurations to the factory defaults Figure 211 Load Factory Default Start Microsoft Inter
413. ring user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 46 on page 397 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS Table 68 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client authentication the Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 25 2 AAA Screens The AAA screens allow you to enable authentication authorization accounting or all of them on the Switch First configure your authentication and accounting server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority activate authorization and configure accounting settings XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Click Advanced Application gt AAA in the navigation panel to display the screen
414. rior au cla E i All thernet Type C Others Hex Layer 2 OA Any MAC Address EUR C MAC x 4 r 5i eda G Any 0 C Destinat MAC Add iy estination ress C MAC 5 j j SCP x os DSC c puc amp All J Establish Only Protoco C Others Dec IP Address ooo 3 layers Address Prefix ME i robs Source G Any Socket Number c C IP Address jogoo C Address Prefix n 1 Destination G any Socket Number c Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Rule Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Classifier LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable this rule Name Enter a descriptive name for this rule for identifying purposes Packet Format Specify the format of the packet Choices are All 802 3 tagged 802 3 untagged Ethernet II tagged and Ethernet II untagged A value of 802 3 indicates that the packets are formatted according to the IEEE 802 3 standards A value of Ethernet II indicates that the packets are formatted according to RFC 894 Ethernet II encapsulation XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 20 Classifier Table 49 Advanced Application gt Classifier continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Layer 2 Specify the fields below to configure a layer 2 classifier VLAN Select Any to classify traffic from any VLAN or select the second option and spec
415. rned by the Switch or static belonging to the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 51 IP Table XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 52 1 ARP Table Overview 52 1 1 Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FF FF FF FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unic
416. ror Message XXE Error Routing domains with same VID can t enable DVMRP simultaneously Back 39 4 Default DVMRP Timer Values The following are some default DVMRP timer values Table 125 DVMRP Default Timer Values DVMRP FIELD DEFAULT VALUE Probe interval 10 sec Report interval 35 sec Route expiration time 140 sec Prune lifetime Variable less than two hours Prune retransmission 3 sec with exponential back time off Graft retransmission 5 sec with exponential back time off 352 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 40 1 40 1 1 Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch DiffServ Overview Quality of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember sta
417. rotocol MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 69 on page 166 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this checkbox to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before Delay changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The al
418. rouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication Authorization and Accounting The Switch supports authentication authorization and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 56 Product Specifications Table 172 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it toa syslog server Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Configuration Backup amp Restoration Make a copy of the Switch s
419. s A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes for the TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes for the TCI Tag Control Information starting after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and the value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible number of VLAN configurations is 4 094
420. s and notes are shown in this User s Guide Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device Note Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The XGS 4526 4528F 4728F may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 5 Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device
421. s as defined in RFC 3580 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 253 Chapter 25 AAA 25 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes 25 3 1 Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This section lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 25 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name the format of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level 1 14 User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 25 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA This value is set to Ethernet 15 on
422. s between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in Timer milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the 8 priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitiv
423. s field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast 24 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 24 1 on page 227 for more information on multicasting Figure 99 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OMS Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active C Querier Dn IGMP Snooping Host Timeout lea 802 1p Priory No Change IGMP Filtering Active C Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Reserved Multicast Group Flooding Drop Port immed Nuri Te Fast ome Group Max Group Throttling IGMP Filtering IGMP Querier Leave Limited Num Profile Mode 8 Sla eh LE Pew m pz Auto zl 1 C 6h cko r fp Dey pez Ao s 2 C faooo cko m fp pe peewz Ato s 3 C a0 c zoo r fo pw Deewz Auto 4 c joo cko cr bw Deewz Auto s c spe cbo Cr ey E Defauts Amn si Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use these settings to configure IGMP Snooping Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to
424. s of the virtual router This field is Master indicating that this Switch functions as the master router This field is Backup indicating that this Switch functions as a backup router This field displays Init when this Switch is initiating the VRRP protocol or when the Uplink Status field displays Dead Uplink Status This field displays the status of the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway This field is Alive indicating that the link between this Switch and the uplink gateway is up Otherwise this field is Dead This field displays Probe when this Switch is check for the link state Poll Interval s The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set I nterval Stop Click Stop to halt system statistic polling 42 3 VRRP Configuration The following sections describe the different parts of the VRRP Configuration screen 42 3 1 IP Interface Setup Before configuring VRRP first create an IP interface or routing domain in the IP Setup screen see the Section 8 6 on page 110 for more information Click IP Application VRRP and click the Configuration link to display the VRRP Configuration screen as shown next Note You can only configure VRRP on interfaces with unique VLAN IDs XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 373 Chapter 42 VRRP Note Routing domai
425. se the user may be required to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning AEE jee ARS alee TEARS ERG BRR ETE TSI FE FASS RES SASR Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Appendix B Legal Information Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore
426. se this screen to search specific MAC addresses You can also directly add dynamic MAC address es into the static MAC forwarding table or MAC filtering table from the MAC table using this screen Figure 240 Management MAC Table Condition Sort hy Transfer Type Index Qik wine ED MAC table Search Transfer Cancel MAC Address U0 02 63 57 ea 1c 00 04 11 9b 78 00 00 11 00 78 1 2 92 00 08 00 11 60 10 00 0f fe 18 00 11 C all C Static C MAC L kb kb kb ee C vip C Port vac OI Dynamic to MAC forwarding C Dynamic to MAC filtering VID Port Type 1 1 dynamic 1 4 dynamic 1 CPU static 1 1 dynamic 1 1 dynamic XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 MAC Table The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 166 Management MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Condition Select All to display all MAC addresses in the MAC table Select Static to only display static MAC address es in this screen Select MAC and enter a valid MAC address six hexadecimal character pairs to display the MAC address information in this screen Select VI D and type a VLAN identification number to display all MAC addresses in the VLAN Select Port and type the number of a port to display all MAC addresses learned from the port Sort by Select this to display and arrange the data according to MAC address MAC VLAN group VI D or port number Port The information is then displa
427. seen or touched Exposed power wire is dangerous Use extreme care when connecting a DC power source to the device To connect a power supply XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 1 Use a screwdriver to loosen the terminal block captive screws 2 Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s RTN return pin and tighten the captive screw 3 Connect the other end of the power wire to the positive terminal on the power supply 4 Connect one end of a power wire to the Switch s 48V input pin and tighten the captive screw 5 Connect the other end of the power wire to the negative terminal on the power supply 6 Insert the terminal block plug in the Switch s terminal block header 3 2 6 External Backup Power Supply Connector The Switch supports external backup power supply BPS The Switch constantly monitors the status of the internal power supply The backup power supply automatically provides power to the Switch in the event of a power failure Once the Switch receives power from the backup power supply it will not automatically switch back to using the internal power supply even when the power is resumed 3 2 7 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters VT100 terminal emulation 9600 bps No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the RS 232 consol
428. sement Interval Preempt Mode Priority Uplink Gateway Primary Virtual IP Secondary Virtual IP iv Example2 192168110724 s 2 zl Vv n 2211300 isz168121 0 0 0 0 EXAMPLE After configuring and saving the VRRP configuration the VRRP Status screens for both switches are shown next Figure 206 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch A ONE Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 2 Backup Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 1 24 1 Master Alive EXAMPLE Figure 207 VRRP Example 2 VRRP Status on Switch B ED VRRP Status Configuration Index Active Network VRID VR Status Uplink Status 1 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 2 Master Alive 2 Yes 192 168 1 10 24 1 Backup Alive XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide ARP Learning 43 1 ARP Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 43 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address it sends it to the device If
429. set DSCP to I EEE802 1p mappings DHCP This link takes you to screens where you can configure the DHCP settings VRRP This link takes you to screens where you can configure redundant virtual router for your network ARP Learning This link takes you to a screen where you can configure ARP learning mode on a per port basis Load Sharing This link takes you to a screen where you can enable Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP routing and set the criteria the Switch uses to determine the routing path for a packet Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and can test port s XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 5 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering Management management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address and VLAN ID of a device attach to a port You can also view
430. signated Router BDR on network segments The DR and BDR keep track of link state updates in their area and make sure LSAs are sent to the rest of the network In most cases the default DR BDR election is fine but in some situations it must be controlled In the following figure only router A has direct connectivity with all the other routers on the network segment Routers B and C do not have a direct connection with each other Therefore they should not be allowed to become DR or BDR Only router A should become the DR Figure 160 OSPF Router Election Example A Cha F M RS B C Cha F Ta J a gt iu I un 9 You can assign a priority to an interface which determines whether this router will be elected to be a DR or BDR The router with the highest priority becomes the DR while a router with a priority of 0 does not participate in router elections In Figure 160 on page 333 you can assign a priority of O to routers B and C thereby ensuring they do not become DR or BDR and assign a priority of 1 to router A to make sure that it does become the DR 37 1 5 Configuring OSPF To configure OSPF on the Switch do the following tasks 1 Enable OSPF XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 333 Chapter 37 OSPF 2 Create OSPF areas 3 Create and associate interface s to an area 4 Create virtual links to maintain backbone connectivity 37 2 OSPF Status Use this screen to view current OSPF status Click IP Application g
431. soon as you make them ARP Learning Mode Select the ARP learning mode the Switch uses on the port Select ARP Reply to have the Switch update the ARP table only with the ARP replies to the ARP requests sent by the Switch Select Gratuitous ARP to have the Switch update its ARP table with either an ARP reply or a gratuitous ARP request Select ARP Request to have the Switch update the ARP table with both ARP replies gratuitous ARP requests and ARP requests XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 ARP Learning Table 139 IP Application ARP Learning continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 43 ARP Learning XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Load Sharing 44 1 Load Sharing Overview The Switch learns the next hop s using ARP and determines routing path s for a destination The Switch supports Equal Cost MultiPath ECMP to forward packets destined to the same device A for example through different routing paths 1 2 and 3 of equal path cost This allows you to balance or share traffic loads
432. splays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 78 P Source Guard Static Binding continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 26 4 DHCP Snooping Use this screen to look at various statistics about the DHCP snooping database To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping Figure 119 DHCP Snooping DHCP Snooping g Configure IPS e Database Status Description Status Agent URL Write delay timer 300 seconds Aborttimer 300 seconds Agent running None Delay timer expiry Not Running Abort timer expiry Not Running Last succeeded time None Last failed time None Last failed reason No failure recorded Times Total attempts 0 Startup failures 0 Successful transfers 0 Failed transfers 0 Successful reads 0 Failed reads 0 Successful writes 0 Failed writes 0 Database detail Description Status First successful access None Last ignored bindings counters Binding co
433. spond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external RADIUS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to th
434. st Table 66 Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this checkbox if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes t
435. t OSPF in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next See Section 37 1 on page 331 for more information on OSPF Figure 161 IP Application gt OSPF Status ORD Configuration Interface am Link State Database Link ID Poll Interval s WLINKO is down line protocol is down OSPF is enabled but not running on this interface swif2 is up line protocol is up Internet Address 192 168 1 10 24 Area 192 168 1 1 Router ID 192 168 1 10 Network Type BROADCAST Cost 15 Transmit Delay is 1 sec State Backup Priority 1l 2 Neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface 192 168 1 1 l Full DR 00 00 34 192 168 1 1 swif2 192 168 OSPF Router with ID 192 168 1 10 Router Link States Area 0 0 0 0 DV Router Age Seq CkSum Link count Ls jao Set Interval Stop The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 115 IP Application gt OSPF Status LABEL DESCRIPTION OSPF This field displays whether OSPF is activated Running or not Down Interface The text box displays the OSPF status of the interface s on the Switch Neighbor The text box displays the status of the neighboring router participating in the OSPF network XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 115 IP Application gt OSPF Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Link State The text box displays information in
436. t begins with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 is defined in private MI Bs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 are specific to the XGS 4526 switch The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 are specific to the XGS 4528F switch The OIDs beginning with 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 are specific to the XGS 4728F switch Table 146 SNMP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the fan 1 2 1 speed goes above or below the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 1 FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the fan 1 2 2 speed returns to the normal operating range 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 1 2 2 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 46 3 1 2 2 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 46 Access Control Table 146 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION temperatur TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 52 3 This trap is sent when the e 1 2 1 temperature goes above or below the normal operating 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 39 3 range 1 2 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 89
437. t bindings The packet is a RELEASE or DECLINE packet and the source MAC address and source port do not match any of the current bindings The rate at which DHCP packets arrive is too high Rate pps Specify the maximum number for DHCP packets 1 2048 that the Switch receives from each port each second The Switch discards any additional DHCP packets Enter 0 to disable this limit which is recommended for trusted ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 26 5 2 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure 272 Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on each VLAN and to specify whether or not the Switch adds DHCP relay agent option 82 information Chapter 41 on page 361 to DHCP requests that the Switch relays to a DHCP server for each VLAN To XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 122 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure ED DHCP Snooping VLAN Configure Configure Show VLAN Start VID i End VID i Apply VID Enabled Option82 Information No s r Apply
438. t field to the next port you want to add 3 Click Add XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 131 Chapter 9 VLAN 9 11 Port based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the Switch on which they were created Note When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it Note In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter 1 as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 9 11 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen and then click VLAN from the navigation panel to display the following screen Select either AII Connected or Port Isolated from the drop down list depending on your VLAN and VLAN security requirements If VLAN members need to communicate directly with each other then select All Connected Select Port Isolated if you want to restrict users from communic
439. tage Under Warn Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE Bias Over Alarm High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE Bias Over Warn High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE SYSLOG NOTICE Bias Under Alarm Low RFACE Threshold lt threshold gt On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE Bias Under Warn Low Threshold threshold On Port port Current Value value SP SYSLOG TYPE INTE RFACE SYSLOG NOTICE TxPower Over Alarm High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE TxPower Over Warn High Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE TxPower Under Alarm Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYPE_INTE RFACE SYSLOG_NOTICE TxPower Under Warn Low Threshold lt threshold gt On Port lt port gt Current Value lt value gt SP_SYSLOG_TYP
440. tch Stack ID number 1000Base T Gigabit Ports V 1 24 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down 1000Base X Mini GBIC Slots A XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table3 LEDs continued LED COLO status DESCRIPTION 1 24 or Green On The port has a successful connection 21224 Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data Off This link is disconnected XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Firefox 2 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 JavaScript enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start
441. tch adds the user defined identifier string and variables into the Agent Circuit ID Sub option The variables can be the slot ID of the PPPoE client the port number of the PPPoE client and or the VLAN ID on the PPPoE packet The identifier string slot ID port number and VLAN ID are separated from each other by a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space An Agent Circuit ID Sub option example is Switch 07 0123 and indicates the PPPoE packets come from a PPPoE client which is connected to the Switch s port 7 and belong to VLAN 123 Table 98 PPPOE IA Circuit ID Sub option Format Using Identifier String and Variables SubOpt Length Value Identifier delimiter Slot ID delimiter String 53 byte XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide delimiter VLAN ID 1byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 4 bytes Chapter 31 PPPoE 31 1 2 2 WT 101 Default Circuit ID Syntax If you do not configure a Circuit ID string for a specific VLAN on a port or for a specific port and disable the flexible Circuit ID syntax in the PPPoE Intermediate Agent screen the Switch automatically generates a Circuit ID string according to the default Circuit ID syntax which is defined in the DSL Forum Working Text WT 101 The default access node identifier is the host name of the PPPoE intermediate agent and the eth indicates Ethernet Table 99 PPPoE IA Circuit ID Sub option Form
442. te combinations of slot port slot VLAN port VLAN and slot port VLAN respectively The Switch enters a zero into the PADI and PADR packets for the slot value delimiter Select a delimiter to separate the identifier string slot ID port number and or VLAN ID from each other You can use a pound key semi colon period comma forward slash or space Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 1 PPPoE IA Per Port Use this screen to specify whether individual ports are trusted or untrusted ports and have the Switch add extra information to PPPoE discovery packets from PPPoE clients on a per port basis XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Note The Switch will drop all PPPoE packets if you enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on the Switch and there are no trusted ports Click the Port link in the Intermediate Agent screen to display the screen as shown Figure 145 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port O MO DM mw 4 CO Nw A ce a iii VLAN Intermediate Agent a nll Server Trusted State Circuit id Remote id Untrusted Untrusted
443. te information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels and the remaining 2 bits are defined as currently unused CU The following figure illustrates the DS field Figure 178 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits CU 2 bits DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping The DSCP value determines the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets as it is forwarded across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide EJ Chapter 40 Differentiated Services 40 1 2 kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a DiffServ network consisting of a group of directly connected DiffServ compliant network devices The boundary node A in Figure 179 in a DiffServ network classifies marks with a DSCP value the incoming packets into different t
444. ted between a service provider and client Two Rate Three Color Marker evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels High packet loss priority level is referred to as red medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green After TRTCM is configured and DiffServ is enabled the following actions are performed on the colored packets Red high loss priority level packets are dropped Yellow medium loss priority level packets are dropped if there is congestion on the network Green low loss priority level packets are forwarded TRTCM operates in one of two modes color blind or color aware In color blind mode packets are marked based on evaluating against the PIR and CIR regardless of if they have previously been marked or not In the color aware mode packets are marked based on both existing color and evaluation against the PIR and CIR If the packets do not match any of colors then the packets proceed unchanged 40 2 1 TRTCM Color blind Mode All packets are evaluated against the PIR If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow Finally if it is below the CIR then it is marked green Figure 180 TRTCM Color blind Mode 40 2 2 TRTCM Color aware Mode In color aware mode the evaluation of the packets uses the existing packet loss priority TRTCM
445. termines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE 802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and backpressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE 802 3x flow control is used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1p Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 12 on page 108 for more information BPDU Control Configure the way to treat BPDUs received on this port You must activate bridging control protocol transparenc
446. termining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before Delay changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that
447. tes access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user MAC An authentication server validates access to a port based on the MAC address and password of the client Both types of authentication use the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 25 1 2 on page 244 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings Note If you enable IEEE 802 1x authentication and MAC authentication on the same port the Switch performs IEEE 802 1x authentication first If a user fails to authenticate via the IEEE 802 1x method then access to the port is denied IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to an IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password after the client responds to its identity request When the client provides the login 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 187 Chapter 18 Port Authentication credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port
448. th Start VI D and End VID Click Apply OX Intermediate Agent Start VID 1 End VID 1 Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No F o 5 Then select Yes to enable PPPoE IA in VLAN 1 and also select Circuit id and Remote id to allow the Switch to add these two strings to frames tagged with VLAN 1 and pass to the PPPOE server Click Apply OM d Intermediate Agent Show VLAN Start VID End VID Apply VID Enabled Circuit id Remote id No L1 L1 1 Yes The settings are completed now If you miss some settings above subscriber C could not successfully receive an IP address assigned by the PPPoE Server If this happens make sure you follow the steps exactly in this tutorial 6 4 How to Use Error Disable and Recovery on the Switch This tutorial shows you how to shut down a port when there is a loop occurred or too many ARP requests over 100 packets per second received on a port XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 6 Tutorials You also want the Switch to wait for a period of time 10 minutes before resuming the port automatically after the problem s are gone Loop guard and Errdiable features are helpful for this demand Note Refer to Section 27 2 on page 285 and Section 32 3 on page 310 for more information about Loop Guard and Errdiable To configure the settings First click Advanced Application gt Loop Guard Select the Active option in the first
449. th of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Figure 126 ARP Inspection Configure ONASANESEESENESCNURTICHHEMNNDB Port VLAN ARP Inspection Active 5 Filter Aging Time Filter aging time ann seconds Log Profile Log buffer size 32 entries Syslog rate 5 entries Log interval n 1 seconds Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 277 Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 278 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 ARP Inspection Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters time Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Type 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog
450. the Transparency Port Setup screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Smart Select Active to enable smart isolation on the Switch The designated Isolation port s then becomes the isolated port Smart isolation allows you to prevent isolated ports on different switches from transmitting traffic to each other Note To use smart isolation you should have configured 802 1Q VLAN port isolation or private VLAN and M RSTP on the Switch Smart isolation does not work with MSTP and or port based VLAN MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC Learning address learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 1000000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See Chapter 9 on page 117 for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range i
451. the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 24 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are able to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then able to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile A profile can be assigned to multiple ports XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 24 Multicast Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt I GMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown Figure 101 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile OSE Multicast Set
452. the link state database which contains Database data in the LSAs Poll The text box displays how often in seconds this screen refreshes You Interval s may change the refresh interval by typing a new number in the text box and then clicking Set I nterval Stop Click Stop to end OSPF status polling The following table describes some common output fields Table 116 OSPF Status Common Output Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Interface Internet This field displays the IP address and subnet bits of an IP routing Address domain Area This field displays the area ID Router ID This field displays the unique ID of the Switch Transmit Delay This field displays the transmission delay in seconds State This field displays the state of the Switch backup or DR designated router Priority This field displays the priority of the Switch This number is used in the designated router election Designated This field displays the router ID of the designated router Router Backup This field displays the router ID of a backup designated router Designated Router Time Intervals Configured This field displays the time intervals in seconds configured Neighbor Count This field displays the number of neighbor routers Adjacent This field displays the number of neighbor router s that is adjacent to Neighbor Count the Switch Neighbor Neighbor ID This fiel
453. the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the percentage tolerance of the voltage with which the Switch still works Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting 8 3 General Setup Use this screen to configure general setti Click Basic Setting and General Setup screen as shown Figure 33 Basic Setting General Setup ngs such as the system name and time in the navigation panel to display the IOTA System Name Location Contact Person s Name None 0 Use Time Server when Bootup Time Server IP Address Current Time O0 50 13 Ute New Time hh mm ss 00 50 13 Current Date New Date yyyy mm dd 1970 E 1 a NN Time Zone UTC bt Daylight Saving Time 1 Start Date First z Sunday v End Date First Sunday It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable of January at 0 00 of January at 0 00 The following table describes the labels Table 11 Basic Setting General Setup in this screen LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Type a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Person s Name
454. thernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 3 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP or XFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down Figure 11 Transceiver Installation Example a 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 12 Installed Transceiver 3 1 3 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 13 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 14 Transceiver Removal Example i el XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 2 Rear Panel 3 2 1 XGS 4526 The following figure shows the rear panel of the Switch Figure 15 Rear Panel A B C D E The rear panel contains A connector for the backup power supply A An optional slot B for installing an EM 422 or EM 412 uplink module An RJ 45
455. tic 1 18 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 77 P Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding P Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infinity if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator dhcp snooping This binding was learned by snooping DHCP packets VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 26 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for DHCP snooping and ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s
456. time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 10 EXAMP BE on MMMM EI CIEN aks 13 E XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 5 Enabling RIP To exchange routing information with other routing devices across different routing domains enable RIP Routing Information Protocol in the RIP screen Click IP Application and RIP in the navigation panel Select Both in the Direction field to set the Switch to broadcast and receive routing information In the Version field select RI P 1 for the RIP packet format that is universally supported xim Active Distance Index Ld 120 Network 192 168 1 1 24 Direction Both v Version RIP 1 EXAMPLE Click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Tutorials This chapter provides some examples of using the web configurator to set up and use the Switch The tutorials include How to Use DHCP Snooping on the Switch How to Use DHCP Relay on the Switch How to Use PPPoE IA on the Switch How to Use Error Disable and Recov
457. ting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Profile Name Default Add Clear Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule n 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 65 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save the profile to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile
458. tion 102 system log 423 system reboot 391 T TACACS 244 setup 247 TACACS 4 Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 243 tagged VLAN 117 temperature 464 temperature indicator 102 time current 105 time zone 105 Time RFC 868 105 time server 105 time service protocol 105 format 105 Time To Live TTL 351 trademarks 477 transceiver installation 39 removal 40 translating RIP into OSPF 340 traps destination 408 TRTCM and bandwidth control 358 and DiffServ 358 color aware mode 355 color blind mode 355 setup 357 trunk group 177 trunking 177 468 example 184 trusted ports ARP inspection 263 DHCP snooping 260 PPPoE IA 301 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 253 tutorials 63 DHCP snooping 63 Error Disable 77 PPPoE IA 72 Two Rate Three Color Marker TRTCM 354 Two Rate Three Color Marker see TRTCM 354 Type of Service ToS 353 U UDLD 294 UniDirectional Link Detection see UDLD untrusted ports ARP inspection 263 DHCP snooping 260 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 489 Index PPPoE IA 301 user profiles 244 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation holes 34 VID 112 117 121 122 221 number of possible VIDs 117 priority frame 117 VID VLAN Identifier 117 virtual links 343 virtual links and OSPF 333 Virtual Router status 373 Virtual Router VR 371 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP 371 VLAN 106 117 468 acceptable frame type 125 automatic
459. tion Protocol 361 DHCP relay option 82 261 DHCP snooping 63 259 260 configuring 261 DHCP relay option 82 261 trusted ports 260 untrusted ports 260 DHCP snooping database 260 diagnostics 423 Ethernet port test 424 ping 424 system log 423 Differentiated Service DiffServ 353 DiffServ 353 activate 356 and TRTCM 358 DS field 353 DSCP 353 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 359 network example 354 PHB 353 dimensions 463 disclaimer 477 double tagged frames 219 DR Designated Router 333 DS Differentiated Services 353 DSCP DSCP to I EEE802 1p mapping 359 service level 353 what it does 353 DSCP DiffServ Code Point 353 DVMRP XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Index Autonomous System 349 default timer setting 352 error message 351 graft 350 how it works 349 implementation 349 probe 350 prune 350 report 350 setup 350 terminology 350 threshold 351 DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol 349 dynamic link aggregation 177 E egress port 135 Error Disable 77 error disable detect 311 error disable recovery configuration 313 overview 309 Ethernet broadcast address 381 451 Ethernet port test 424 Ethernet ports 38 default settings 39 example summary address 341 exchange RIP and OSPF information 339 external authentication server 244 F fan speed 103 FCC interference statement 477 file transfer using FTP command example 394 filename convention configuration configuration fi
460. tion between computer A and computer B passes through computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 12 on page 145 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 26 1 2 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection This setting is independent of the trusted untrusted setting for DHCP snooping You can also specify the maximum rate at which the Switch receives ARP packets on untrusted ports The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports in the following situations The sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings The rate at which ARP packets arrive is too high 26 1 2 3
461. tly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the RADIUS Server Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured via the TACACS Server Authorization Use this section to configure authorization settings on the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA Table 71 Advanced Application gt AAA gt AAA Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Set whether the Switch provides the following services to a user Exec Allow an administrator which logs in the Switch through Telnet or SSH to have different access privilege level assigned via the external server e Dotlx Allow an IEEE 802 1x client to have different bandwidth limit or VLAN ID assigned via the external server Active Select this to activate authorization for a specified event types Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for authorizatio
462. to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select Active to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 40 3 1 Configuring 2 Rate 3 Color Marker Settings Use this screen to configure TRTCM settings Click the 2 rate 3 Color Marker link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 357 Chapter 40 Differentiated Services Note You cannot enable both TRTCM and Bandwidth Control at the same time Figure 183 IP Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker r color blind C color aware Port Active Commit Rate green E AU TT Z B x i Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 127 P Application gt DiffServ gt 2 rate 3 Color Marker LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to activate TRTCM Two Rate Three Color Marker on the Switc
463. to send RIP routing information to all RIP v2 routers on the same network segment A multicast router will not forward a packet with the destination IP address within this range to other networks See the IANA web site for more information The layer 2 multicast MAC addresses used by Cisco layer 2 protocols 01 00 0C CC CC CC and 01 00 0C CC CC CD are also included in this group Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives a frame with a reserved multicast address Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Normal Leave Enter an IGMP normal leave timeout value from 200 to 6 348 800 in miliseconds Select this option to have the Switch use this timeout to update the forwarding table for the port In normal leave mode when the Switch receives an IGMP leave message from a host on a port the
464. to the external metrics Select 2 for routing protocols whose external metrics are not comparable to the OSPF cost In this case the external cost of the AB boundary router is used in path decision to a destination Metric Value Enter a route cost between 0 and 16777215 The default metric value is 15 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 37 OSPF Table 120 IP Application gt OSPF Configuration gt Redistribute continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Summary 192 168 10 0 24 and 192 168 11 0 24 all of these networks Enter a network IP address which can cover more than one network in address order to reduce the routing table size For example you can use 192 168 8 0 22 instead of using 192 168 8 0 24 192 168 9 0 24 The third octet of these four network IP addresses is 00001000 00001001 00001010 00001011 respectively The first 6 digits 000010 are the common part among these IP addresses So 192 168 8 0 22 can represent volatile memory when you are done configuring Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this summary IP address which can cover mask
465. to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP clients DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent I nformation This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent I nformation feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent I nformation can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings gt General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 132 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings General Setup XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 41 DHCP 41 4 2 Configuring
466. to tus UNE Ce pbi IR 57 TONAS e 63 Rite Be 93 Sram Simus and Por SILIO uides eee aeo eb ee au ei ces eu pe uc oce e coeunt Exe ub aas 95 sci persil MENT DELE oan t dat aac 101 VLAN 117 suc MAC TOIT SIDE iusodsklaecomparxpiadir pj rd para ato deni pna rhe o geht a aq al 187 ege Mullieast Famvard SEI sssusa E nia dab bes UU SERI UN IQ be uM dt eaten aac 141 xc 145 Spamo Moe POOU NURSE T 147 zr qai sanionen nenna 169 Ernadcast bern MATO A E UT 173 VD Ef s Mee ec Dr sans 175 Ry mess m 177 wont peu TUM ditugpall iabiund aa baniyaeida janes ad aasertenaneanna shun 187 PIE rs BOUIN MET I T oUm 197 Er oli R 201 xil dr m HO 207 Cue Melod arosine n dia kece tuddi eia taPe heb nde ReRM MU a ot b Eso IR dn ae UM SEogds 215 VLAN SANG m 219 pe ME TT 227 EQ ce R pegging adage etd aetna 243 IP SoUo OUA a 259 Es o EKE e E t A AT T dad ads ena ua E EN A A E T 283 pP D Re ia a a a 287 Laor 2 FOL Tn ea 291 cgo WR UM O T PH 295 s 299 Cupio Wr TM rrr 309 gig dk EL UT LEURS 215 SE TERIS MET
467. tocol 13 1 5 13 1 5 1 Note Each port can belong to one STP tree only Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backwards compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANs can use distinct paths in a region MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link Figure 57 STP RSTP Network Example XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol With MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 58 MSTP Network Example 13 1 5 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple net
468. tocol Based Vlan VLAN Status GVRP 5 Port Ingress Check PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking Isolation D I T E All D nm 1 O 1 i All g Li 2 O 1 m All x O 3 C 1 i All bd C 4 1 Li All X E r 5 1 All X Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to permit VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Ingress Check If this check box is selected for a port the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not include this port in its member set Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering PVID A PVID Port VLAN ID is a tag that adds to incoming untagged frames received on a port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines Enter a number between land 4094
469. tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST instance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range
470. tt t a rc d re Dr pa ep RR PX 311 22 5 Error Disable Recovery Contigurelihi 2 uiuis corde koi dre seite oed ada ax eaten 313 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 33 PULE UW en E p M RNC M EUER 315 33 1 Private VLAN Overview sssssssssseeeennereeneennmnennhenn nn netehen sss n nest sss s sss a sends asas sas s nenne 315 oe CORTIQUHITEG Private VLAN er 316 Chapter 34 SUEUR PUL 2 TNT 319 to Ve LU CTI f ET EE 319 34 2 Cuniguring Stai POLUM aesieszacssesuzexkank dud ekaer E Eck ands Pad ag axu FAM GRE Frag qRaNA Pata ERE E FbR MK MEET EF RUE 320 Chapter 35 Policy ROUNO nean sa AX MODE DR EU EA RETIA IUE RR RENS ER CAU EXE HERR A GERA XA AE DUE A OEEKEOR OU REDI HEX EL 323 25 3 Paley Roule CHABPIIER sodiusitsensexxtendastku af beau Desc can aant agus atop bride Ga di ad ua 323 d 1 BONOS ocoeoisceciedi aea esci bt etecanien opu dnte commedo tard bete ind iadbec nun iebe ftu curru n dE I cue 323 35 2 Configuring Policy Routing Profile ucisseneierniskiioe eni venne eG enr nr 324 35 2 1 Policy Routing Rule COngllabielLuaaassuiecsk ni qaaa picti giexa istis saa 325 Chapter 36 l t TERTII TINI I IT LISTS CT E A E O T E E 327 Cw RIP OVON ON e C TOO Ne dp mE ORE E 327 36 1 1 Administrative DISTANCE Lire irm tit rr Reno drca tace d ca ber cca teda aa 327 EASE Ee DE eee c eo UT 328 Chapter 37 OSPF e MEN 331 BFW a CUBA Leonis tere ponti i FehPes obi x Gage ea a Sead r
471. ture measured at this sensor 102 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan Speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a RPM sufficiently ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in RPM 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltage V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays
472. uery packets to all ports The Switch then listens for IGMP Report packets and it records which port the messages came from It then delivers multicast traffic to only those ports from which it received a request to join a multicast group XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 347 Chapter 38 IGMP 38 3 Configuring IGMP Click IP Application gt IGMP in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Each entry in the table is automatically created when you configure a new IP domain in the IP Setup screen refer to Section 8 6 on page 110 Figure 172 IP Application gt IGMP e xn Active D Unknown Multicast Frame amp Flooding C Drop Index 1 2 Network Version 172 23 37 209 24 None X 192 158 1 1 24 None hd Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 123 P Application IGMP LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable IGMP on the Switch Note You cannot enable both IGMP snooping and IGMP at the same time Refer to Section 24 4 on page 232 for more information on IGMP snooping Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Unknown multicast frames are addressed to multicast groups for which the Switch has not recorded any group members Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all ports Index This field displays a
473. uide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server In the following figure only ports that need access to the server need to be part of VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 4 Shared Server Using VLAN Example t L 1 L 1 I 1 1 a 1 L 1 L a a 1 LI 1 1 5 IPv6 Support Pv6 Internet Protocol version 6 is designed to enhance IP address size and features The increase in IPv6 address size to 128 bits from the 32 bit IPv4 address allows up to 3 4 x 10 8 IP addresses At the time of writing the Switch supports the following features Static address assignment and stateless auto configuration e Neighbor Discovery Protocol a protocol used to discover other IPv6 devices in a network Remote Management using ping SNMP telnet HTTP and FTP services CMPv6 to report errors encountered in packet processing and perform diagnostic functions such as ping IPv4 I Pv6 dual stack the Switch can run IPv4 and IPv6 at the same time DHCPv6 client and relay Multicast Listener Discovery MLD snooping and proxy For more information on IPv6 refer to the CLI Reference Guide 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday m
474. untagged frames that this port received Acceptable Frame Type You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged incoming frames just tagged incoming frames or just untagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member 9 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices The following figure describes VLAN Trunking Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups 1 and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 9 VLAN allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 37 Port VLAN Trunking c E TN EB N V1 v2 D V1 v2 9 4 Select the VLAN Type Select a VLAN type in the Basic Setting Switch Setup screen Figure 38 Switch Setup
475. urce Guard 26 6 2 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status Figure 125 ARP Inspection Log Status Total number of logs 0 E ARP Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Index Port VID Sender Mac Sender IP NumPkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 ARP Inspection Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated table by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Total number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender Mac This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field
476. user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 25 1 2 on page 244 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 25 AAA 25 1 1 25 1 2 25 1 2 on page 244 as external authentication authorization and accounting servers Figure 110 AAA Server Local User Accounts By sto
477. ustments on a VLAN by VLAN basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the VLANs as soon as you make them Circuit id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Circuit ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed The Circuit ID you configure here has the highest priority XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 31 PPPoE Table 102 Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Remote id Enter a string of up to 63 ASCII characters that the Switch adds into the Agent Remote ID sub option for this VLAN on the specified port Spaces are allowed If you do not specify a string here or in the Remote id field for a specific port the Switch automatically uses the PPPoE client s MAC address The Remote ID you configure here has the highest priority Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 31 3 3 PPPoE IA for VLAN Use this screen to set whether the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on a VLAN and whether the Switch appends the Circuit ID and or Remote ID to PPPoE discovery packets from a s
478. uthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives a DHCP or ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds the binding table by snooping DHCP packets dynamic bindings and from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table DHCP snooping Use this to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network If you want to use dynamic bindings to filter unauthorized ARP packets typical implementation you have to enable DHCP snooping before you enable ARP inspection XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 26 1 1 DHCP Snooping Overview Use DHCP snooping to filter unauthorized DHCP packets on the network and to build the binding table dynamically This can prevent clients from getting IP addresses from unauthorized DHCP servers 26 1 1 1 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for DHCP
479. v v 2 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fj E i Ej a 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LJ LJ LJ 6 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E my m pg wm m P 7 EJ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 g 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L1 EJ a O L1 9 Ej 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O E L L L 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o O o 12 L1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L1 o m LJ Li LJ LI 13 O 0000 0 0 0 0 I o 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ull E 15 oO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 L a a L L Li 16 oO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 E L1 Oo O E The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 156 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management End Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can Address manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SS
480. was a trusted interface or does not exist anymore XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard Table 79 DHCP Snooping continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Parse failures This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the Switch was unable to understand the binding in the DHCP binding database Expired leases This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the lease time had already expired Unsupported vlans This field displays the number of bindings the Switch has ignored because the VLAN ID does not exist anymore 26 5 DHCP Snooping Configure Use this screen to enable DHCP snooping on the Switch not on specific VLAN specify the VLAN where the default DHCP server is located and configure the DHCP snooping database The DHCP snooping database stores the current bindings on a secure external TFTP server so that they are still available after a restart To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt DHCP Snooping gt Configure Figure 120 DHCP Snooping Configure ED DHCP Snooping Configure Port VLAN DHCP Snooping Active r Disable DHCP Vian il am Database Agent URL Timeout interval 300 seconds Write delay interval 300 seconds Renew DHCP Snooping URL Renew Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 26 IP Source Guard 270 The
481. what kind of MAC address it is IP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the IP addresses and VLAN ID of a device attached to a port You can also view what kind of device it is ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC address IP address resolution table Routing Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the routing table Configure This link takes you to a screen where you can copy attributes of one port Clone to an other port s 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen Figure 21 Change Administrator Login Password acri Administrator Edit Logins 1 4 Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Login User Name Password Retype to confirm Access Control XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile mem
482. which you want this IP interface to belong This is the same as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen 6 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 2 Configuring DHCP Server Settings You can set the Switch to assign network information such as the IP address DNS server etc to DHCP clients on the network For the example network configure two DHCP client pools on the Switch for the DHCP clients in the RD and Sales networks 1 Inthe web configurator click IP eomma Status Application and DHCP in the VID 2 navigation panel and click the DHCP Status du elay VLAN link Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 2 100 Size of Client IP Pool 66 2 Inthe VLAN Setting screen IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 specify the ID of the VLAN to DEA IER E 5 Primary DNS Server 172 16 3 1 which the DHCP clients belong cA ENS a the starting IP r l Relay ata g address pog Remote DHCP Server 1 i subnet mask default gateway a ao aor ain eee address and the DNS server Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Option 82 address es on je EXAMPLE 3 Click Add to save the settings to Add Cancel Clear the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off 5 1 3 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs
483. width Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate egress rate limits on this port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 171 Chapter 14 Bandwidth Control 172 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 15 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast multicast and destination lookup failure DLF packets the Switch receives per second on the ports When the maximum number of allowable broadcast multicast and or DLF packets is reached per second the subsequent packets are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast multicast and or DLF packets in your network You can specify limits for each packet type on each port Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 71 Advanc
484. witch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands see the Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius or tacacs to have the Switch check the access privilege via the external servers Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correc
485. witch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click Clearto return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server P Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 427 Chapter 48 Syslog 48 4 Syslog Messages The following table shows log messages the Switch may generate Table 161 Syslog Messages LOG TYPE SEVERITY MESSAGE SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG ERR Authentication failure SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO SSH User username login SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO SSH forced out by disabling multi login SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO SSH forced out by local user SP SYSLOG TYPE AAA SYSLOG INFO Telnet forced out by disab
486. wn Figure 85 Advanced Application gt Port Security MAC Freeze Port List Port Security Active Port Active Li 1 O 2 r 3 LH 4 Ci r ED Port Security d VLAN MAC Address Limit MAC freeze Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 2 z 159 9 49 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Port List Enter the number of the port s separated by a comma on which you want to enable port security and disable MAC address learning After you click MAC freeze all previously learned MAC addresses on the specified port s will become static MAC addresses and display in the Static MAC Forwarding screen MAC freeze Click MAC freeze to have the Switch automatically select the Active check boxes and clear the Address Learning check boxes only for the ports specified in the Port list Active Select this option to enable port security on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some of the settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 19 Port
487. work devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region VLAN to MST Instance mapping 13 1 5 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 151 Chapter 13 Spanning Tree Protocol The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 59 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2 MSTI 2 13 1 5 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of t
488. xI Ee bey BRE eis iiia 142 Chapter 12 gai 145 puer salire WU T 145 Chapter 13 Spaning meg gp o MT 147 Pe SUPP yer cxdbscodkbredtdditceiu amberinied T eM D n 147 ket STP EE E UU 147 TS Ds SAO VIDA Luendieusscduncosis tia drud Erben alin tes dal Fette omuia dox Nd E GIN RU Rd 148 Wee ee PU SAS cm 149 pom nuire A TEN 149 jx Ec Hio i i cot RT qc 150 13 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status BOIS cuiseccscexcecne tre tiir ret erae cesi idee Erbe aai 153 15 3 panning Tes GODIIQUFGlDIE igeni dbi pe Ode unda ec RR M RLbI a a bar rr em R RUE 153 134 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree PTOIGDO usse epeidantet ent exon o redi oir hernie 154 19 5 Rapid Spaning Tres Protocol SAUS oueixctaeseccanxspetcxpee tract iersinii 156 13 6 Configure Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol sessessseeeeeeees 158 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status sess 160 13 8 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol esseeseesesseesee enne 162 13 8 1 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Port Configuration sesssssssss 165 19 9 Multiple Spanning Tree ProlOGO Status aucemsssxdexpecue nananana ete phas peb aaa 166 XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Table of Contents Chapter 14 cri cp pea A
489. xt box and reset the syslog entry XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 47 Diagnostic Table 157 Management Diagnostic continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Enter a port number and click Port Test to perform an internal loopback test XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide This chapter explains the syslog screens 48 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 158 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning conditi
490. y Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 25 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 25 1 2 on page 244 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown Figure 113 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup ED TACACS Server NENNNNED Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode indexpriority Timeout f30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 Dr 2 0 0 0 0 49 rH Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 49 n 2 0 0 0 0 49 n Apply Cancel XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 247 Chapter 25 AAA The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 70 Advanced Application gt AAA gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Server Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select i
491. y in the Switch Setup screen first Select Peer to process any BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units received on this port Select Tunnel to forward BPDUs received on this port Select Discard to drop any BPDU received on this port Select Network to process a BPDU with no VLAN tag and forward a tagged BPDU CX4 Cable For the XGS 4526 this field is available when you install an EM 412 module in the Switch s optional uplink module slot see Section 3 2 on page 41 Select the number of meters for the length of the LOGBASE CX4 cable you use to connect between the Switch and another switch for stacking XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 8 Basic Setting Table 14 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 115 Chapter 8 Basic Setting XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 9 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN
492. y numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended that you assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 26 on page 148 for more information Tree Select which STP tree configuration this port should participate in Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 13 7 Multiple Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 13 1 on page 147 for more information on MRSTP Note This screen is only available after you activate MRSTP on the Switch Figure 66 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Status MRSTP a panning Iree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MRSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MRSTP Tree T Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 8000 001349000002 8000 001349000002 Hello Time second 2 2 Max Age second 20 20 Forwarding Delay second 15 15 Cost to
493. yed in the summary table below Transfer Type Select Dynamic to MAC forwarding and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address es you select the criteria here into the static MAC forwarding table see Section 10 2 on page 137 The type of the MAC address es will be changed to static Select Dynamic to MAC filtering and click Transfer to add the relative dynamic MAC address es you make the search here into the static MAC filtering table see Section 12 1 on page 145 The MAC address es will be removed from the MAC table and all traffic sent from the MAC address es will be blocked by the Switch Search Click this to search data in the MAC table according to your input criteria Transfer Click this to perform the MAC address transferring you selected in the Transfer Type field Cancel Click this to begin configuring the search criteria afresh Index This is the incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 50 MAC Table XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide IP Table This chapter introduces
494. yer 2 Protocol Protocol Tunneling settings on the Switch Tunneling sFlow This link takes you to screens where you can configure sFlow settings on the Switch PPPoE This link takes you to screens where you can configure how the Switch gives a PPPoE termination server additional subscriber information that the server can use to identify and authenticate a PPPOE client Errdisable This link takes you to a screen where you can configure CPU protection and error disable recovery Private VLAN This link takes you to a screen where you can block traffic between ports in a VLAN on the Switch IP Application Static Route This link takes you to a screen where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually Policy Routing This link takes you to screens where you can configure policy routing rules RIP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the RIP Routing Information Protocol direction and versions OSPF This link takes you to screens where you can view the OSPF status and configure OSPF settings IGMP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the GMP settings DVMRP This link takes you to a screen where you can configure the DVMRP Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol settings DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ configure marking rules and
495. you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 135 Chapter 9 VLAN XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Static MAC Forward Setup Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 10 1 Overview This chapter discusses how to configure forwarding rules based on MAC addresses of devices on your network 10 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allows only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 19 on page 197 for more information on port security XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide 137 Chapter 10 Static MAC Forward Setup Click Advanced Applications Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown Figure 50 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding Static MAC Forwarding g Active O Name MAC Address VID Port Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Advanced Appl
496. your Switch See the chapter on VLANs for more background information on Virtual LAN 23 1 VLAN Stacking Overview A service provider can use VLAN stacking to allow it to distinguish multiple customers VLANs even those with the same customer assigned VLAN ID within its network Use VLAN stacking to add an outer VLAN tag to the inner IEEE 802 1Q tagged frames that enter the network By tagging the tagged frames double tagged frames the service provider can manage up to 4 094 VLAN groups with each group containing up to 4 094 customer VLANSs This allows a service provider to provide different service based on specific VLANs for many different customers A service provider s customers may require a range of VLANs to handle multiple applications A service provider s customers can assign their own inner VLAN tags on ports for these applications The service provider can assign an outer VLAN tag for each customer Therefore there is no VLAN tag overlap among customers so traffic from different customers is kept separate 23 1 1 VLAN Stacking Example In the following example figure both A and B are Service Provider s Network SPN customers with VPN tunnels between their head offices and branch offices respectively Both have an identical VLAN tag for their VLAN group The service provider can separate these two VLANs within its network by adding tag 37 to XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 23 VLAN Stacking distingu
497. your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 48 Syslog 48 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers Figure 233 Management Syslog Server Setup e Syslog Server Setup Syslog Setup Active C Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 160 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The S
498. your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default management IP address is 192 168 1 1 through an in band non MGMT port and 192 168 0 1 through the MGMT port in the Location or Address field Press ENTER XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen Figure 19 Web Configurator Login Connect to 192 168 1 1 The server 192 168 1 1 at XG5 4728F at Thu Jan 1 06 41 51 1970 requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name admin Password CEIT C Remember my password 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Web Configurator Layout The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator This guide uses the XGS 4728F screens as an example The screens may vary slightly for different models XGS 4526 4528F 4728F User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 20 The Web Configurator Layout E Save Status J
499. yphens and spaces are also allowed The default is the Switch s host name circuit id Use this section to configure the Circuit ID field in the PADI and PADR packets The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port or for a specific VLAN on a port has priority over this The Circuit ID you configure for a specific port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port screen or for a specific VLAN on a port in the Advanced Application gt PPPoE gt Intermediate Agent gt Port gt VLAN screen has priority over this That means if you also want to configure PPPoE IA Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN setting leave the fields here empty and configure circuit id and remote id in the Per Port or Per Port Per VLAN screen Active Select this option to have the Switch add the user defined identifier string and variables specified in the option field to PADI or PADR packets from PPPoE clients If you leave this option unselected and do not configure any Circuit ID string using CLI commands on the Switch the Switch will use the string specified in the access node identifier field identifier Specify a string that the Switch adds in the Agent Circuit ID sub option string You can enter up to 53 ASCII characters Spaces are allowed option Select the variables that you want the Switch to generate and add in the Agent Circuit ID sub option The variable options include sp sv pv and spv which indica

ZyXEL 4728F User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents